New Beginnings free porn video

New Beginnings: A Winnisimmet Tales Story By Efin Copyright 2015 Looking In Publications All rights reserved This book is a complete work of fiction. Any possible similarity to another work is completely coincidental and unintentional. Situations are made up based on the author's own feelings and are in no way based on reality. This book is dedicated to all of the transgender fiction authors. Reading so many different styles of writing and so many stories over the years inspired me to write this book. Hopefully some enjoyment can be brought to you as your works have brought to me. Chapter 1: Classes and Stubbornness It was just after lunch and the 8th graders at Winnisimmet Middle School were having phy ed. It was three weeks into the school year so it was the first time they would have to change for class. They had the option of changing or wearing their regular school clothes but having gone through the troubles of wearing t-shirts and blouses over skirts or jeans the girls during class the year before they weren't about to endure that torture again. It was better to spend a few minutes changing than to have to worry about things becoming "see through" or clinging in the wrong way. Changing in front of other girls for the first time made most of the girls nervous. None more so than Jaimie Finn. Jaimie was transgender and due to a severe beating 15 months before that cost her her testicles she was allowed to use the girls' locker rooms. Despite her friends all standing beside her, she was extremely nervous, sweating profusely and looking pale. Jaimie was given a hard time by other girls over her breasts, many making fun of them for being so large. One joked that, "Someone might say they were fake." Jenna Connors, always the loyal best friend and ardent Jaimie defender pointed out, "Are you jealous that they got so large on their own or that yours might not be as big without surgery?" The other girls laughed at the blunt and truthful reply and left Jaimie alone after that. Jenna started saying, "It's official; you are one of us girls. Jealousy over your body is rule #1 of being a girl." Stacy Lopez, Claire Peterson, and Courtney Lawrence all said, "Yep!" in agreement, smiling at the whole situation. Despite getting the breast situation out of the way girls were still staring at her, particularly at her crotch. There were whispers asking, "Can you see 'it'?" among the other girls. Jaimie didn't care; the girls knew she still had "it" but nothing else down there. Her friends had long since stopped looking due to their beach trips and her classmates were just getting up to their level of acceptance of her body. She had a little "extra" but nothing else on her was "boyish." After changing the kids started running around doing the normal activities when Jaimie started to feel light headed. Despite only just starting to run was sweating a lot more than normal and was very red. The gym teacher, Zeke Williams, looked at her, felt her head, and said, "Go see the nurse, you are burning up. You were told by your dad and Ms. Vega to come to us if you weren't feeling well, your doctor didn't give you full clearance to participate yet." Jaimie tried to plead but he turned to Courtney and said, "Escort her to the nurse; don't let her tell you otherwise." Courtney and Jaimie walked off to change with the others looking concerned. Inside the girls started changing when the 6th graders came in. Rebecca Lopez asked why they were there and was told what was going on. The younger girls stared at Jaimie as she slowly changed. They knew what she was but couldn't believe she looked so much like a girl. Like the 8th-graders, they were looking at her shorts and panties while she changed, trying to see if there was anything there. Jaimie turned away making some of them giggle while Rebecca and Courtney's sister Jessie groaned at the immaturity of their classmates. Halfway through changing Jaimie started to wobble and couldn't stand up. One of the girls said something to Rebecca which got her to rush to the nurse's office. Courtney saw Jaimie and grabbed a towel, wet it, and put it on her forehead. The nurse came in, saw Jaimie's red face and sweat and sent for the principal. She took her temperature then called an ambulance while having one of the kids rush for ice packs from her office. Jaimie passed out completely. She had multiple ice packs around her to try to keep her temperature down as she was driven away. Principal Dorothy Vega rode in with her, frantically calling Jaimie's mother Valerie's phone. Before long Jaimie was in the emergency room getting evaluated. Dorothy asked that John is called while she tried to get in contact with Valerie. After a minute the nurse came back and told her, "Her father has given you permission to sign off on care. He is on his way now but will be about an hour." Dorothy agreed and signed what she needed to sign knowing almost as much about her medical history as her father John. Jaimie was wheeled upstairs to a room and given a strong dose of antibiotics and wrapped in ice. Eventually, her temperature stopped rising and started to fall allowing Dorothy to get some breathing room outside. She saw John and led him upstairs where Jaimie was. After filling in the details John told Jaimie, "I never want you to hide illness from us ever again. You could have died today. We love you too much to let harm come to you if you feel sick just tell us." Jaimie cried saying, "I'm sorry dad I didn't want to cause a fuss." Dorothy excused herself with a big thank you from John. She was met outside by Dan Lopez and Jaimie's friends. She told them what went on and left, whispering to herself, "That poor kid can't catch a break." Upstairs the kids were told they would only have a short time with Jaimie. Rebecca scolded her saying, "Don't be stupid again." Stacy asked when she could go home; John shook his head saying, "Maybe the weekend." The kids got her schoolwork and would bring it by until she returned. Jaimie's boyfriend Richard Samuels Jr. couldn't say anything and wouldn't go near Jaimie. Jenna asked him why, all she got was, "This is twice in three months, the third time we might lose her for good." The two walked downstairs so the others couldn't see him crying, Jenna saying, "She knows you care for her, you don't have to hide because you are scared." He didn't say anything, just looked out and waited for the others. His cousin Will Riley, the normally calm and cool member of the group, swore and punched a wall in frustration. He knew Richard was scared and couldn't find the right words to comfort him. Richard saw his actions and quietly said, "I know man, I know. I just can't see her in pain." Will nods and calmed down as the others came out. Jaimie was in the hospital for four days during which John was at her side. At school, the following Monday Jaimie was excused from gym for the next month which got kids grumbling about special treatment. Jenna was the strongest voice against complainers telling them, "She almost died because idiots like you complain about her. She didn't want to go home sick and she sure as hell doesn't want to miss class. If you have a problem with that there is something seriously wrong with you." Zeke Williams kept an eye on Jaimie even though she wasn't participating in gym. He kept her busy during classes and had her doing extra work to set up and take down things while the others were changing. She didn't mind doing that for him, even if it was just something to keep her occupied. Seeing her forced to do things nobody else wanted to do shut up most of the complainers with Zeke asking the kids, "Anyone else going to whine about her not taking part? I can give you this work as well but it won't count towards your grade." Nobody complained about her after that day. John started to have problems with his college work due to Jaimie's hospital stay. He was already stretched to the point of exhaustion due to his newborn twins, Jaimie's hospital stay stretched him even further. He was spent and could barely stay awake during classes. He needed to change his schedule around to being an online student with his education course being the only, "In person" classes. After hearing about Jaimie's medical crisis and that he had newborn twins the dean of the history department gladly accepted the change and gave him tips for what required seminars to take to get the most work done in the least amount of time. Looking over the highlighted seminars one, in particular, caught his eye. It was taught by Dr. Alison Eliza, Jaimie's gender therapist. John couldn't resist the chance to hear her speak. Jaimie spoke well of her, almost to the point of idolizing. John signed up for it as well as changed his schedule around to accommodate his fatherly duties. The dean proudly told him, "We wouldn't do this for just anybody; you have given us so many students thanks to your scholarships that you are worth the effort of helping.." Chapter 2: Seminars and Schooling The day Jaimie was released John was told he had to meet with the state about his upcoming teaching license. It was an informal meeting, more of an information session. John was told the requirements that he had to meet before they granted him a license. John was in trouble, though, he was into his second year as a student but due to the classwork and need to be there for Jaimie and Michael last year, he wasn't able to do any actual teaching yet. This meant he had three semesters instead of two left until he got his license. It also meant that he would not be able to teach as a professional for two years. John had an ace in the hole. Attending the meeting was Dean Zane, the head of the university's education department. Dean Zane and John had gotten along well since meeting eight months before when it was found out that John was in a class about the Newhall, MO tutoring program. John was excused from the class, given full credit for it, and actually made the presentation Dorothy Vega was brought to the school to do. In the conference room, Dean Zane asked about acceptance of out of state hours, which threw the board member for a loop. Dean Zane explained, "Mr. Finn has had well over 200 hours of preparation, classroom, one on one, and group teaching already. He did so in both Winnisimmet and in Newhall, Missouri. All of these hours are documented on video backed up with classwork papers and the marks for individual students which Mr. Finn can provide anytime you wish. He also has four people who can verify the authenticity of these as well as confirm the hours of preparation put in before." John was impressed. Dean Zane finally said, "Are you aware of the Winnisimmet tutoring program?" The board member simply replied, "Yes." Dean Zane proudly proclaimed, "That entire program is due to the work of John Finn as was the initial program on which it is based. This program is within strict state guidelines for education, so Mr. Finn's hours spent tutoring should count as hours spent teaching." The board member looked angered. Dean Zane sensed that this was falling on deaf ears. He looked at John then back at the board member and stated, "We will be informing the full board about these hours and attend the meeting regarding the waiver when you give your report to the board. I am under the strong impression that the full board does not share your biased views regarding waivers so we will hedge our bets and back him with them. We are also more than willing to go to the Secretary of Education with a complaint if it comes down to it. I am proud to say that I don't believe you would be on the board for much longer if you still felt the need to push the others around." The board member dismissed John and the dean gruffly saying, "We will be in touch." John thanked Dean Zone who simply said, "We support the best, and you are one of the best." John wasn't so sure the waiver would work. Dean Zane reassured him. He told John, "Good luck with Winnisimmet, it can be fun but it can also be a pain." John smiled and said, "I'll give it my all." Two nights later John was back in school for Dr. Eliza's seminar. John greeted her at the door to the lecture hall and told her about Jaimie's missed appointment, watching her wince at the thought. She replied, "I'll talk with her, thanks for letting me know." Dr. Eliza took to the stage and thanked the audience for coming and announced that they would have to wait a couple of more minutes until the last panelist came. As she was speaking she was handed a note and looked concerned. She walked over to John and asked to speak with him. She asked in a quivering voice, "We had a last minute cancellation and need another panelist. None of our other potential parents can come or refused to help. I was hoping you could help us out." John looked at the audience who were getting anxious. He turned to Dr. Eliza and agreed but added, "I don't know how much help I will be; you know we are a unique situation." Dr. Eliza led him to the stage and apologized saying, "We have had a last minute cancellation. We were lucky to have in our audience someone who is gracious enough to help out in a pinch. Mr. Finn, thank you for helping." The crowd clapped in gratitude as John took his seat. Dr. Eliza gave a presentation about the topic of the night that lasted a half hour. After the presentation, she introduced the other panelists who told their stories about having a transgender child. Each was heartbreaking and brought tears to John's eyes. He was visibly moved and his hands were shaking. He listened closely to tales of abuse, suicide, rejection, and other things that he was grateful he hadn't experienced anything close to what they experienced as parents. After the fourth story, Dr. Eliza introduced John. She stated that, "John's story is different; one that I hope would one day become the norm." She gave a little background on John's situation which got sneers and other nasty looks from the other panelists. She told about John's and Jaimie's past and his fight to keep her. She told about her being attacked by Scott and his cohorts and her refusing to take it as a bad thing. She mostly focused on John's family and their reactions which got John feeling bad. When she finished she asked John to give his perspective. John took a minute to find the right words before saying, "As you heard our story is different. We dealt with shunning and abuse but we moved away before it could impact us beyond a few days. The abuse she did receive physically cost her any chance of becoming 'normal' if she had decided that she wasn't really a girl. The thought never crossed her mind, though, she sees it as a positive. My daughter was lucky to have family support that accepted her transition and relatives that would stand up and fight for her against bigotry and ignorance even in our own family. She also has the ability to win over people, making them into friends and supporters just by being herself. I know it's atypical but it's the truth. She still suffers ignorance and abuse from people but thanks to the friends she has made she has people helping her out and cutting them off before their ignorance spreads." John thought about the last week and added, "Despite all of this support she still has bouts of depression and fears negative reactions. She nearly died last week because she was afraid that people would complain about her receiving special treatment for going to the nurse or even missing school. She was lucky that her teacher noticed she was feeling sick and sent her off to the nurse which saved her life." Dr. Eliza looked shocked and mouthed, "That bad?" to John. He nodded and she shook her head. Dr. Eliza opened up the floor for questions. John was the focus of most since he had the oddest story. Dr. Eliza was able to answer them for John, who was visibly awkward and wincing. John answered questions about the start of her transition; some questioned why he didn't stay put in Missouri. John was quick to state that the family put it to a vote and asked that they move, which included his daughter. John tried hard to steer questions to other panelists but their stories being so similar the audience didn't seem to bother, opting to question John. Questions about what happened to Scott West, the boy who assaulted Jaimie in Newhall and what the school did after her assault caused him to relive that last month again. He was leveled lots of praise on Dorothy Vega for her support and reaction. She endured a lot due to the incident, much of which she kept to herself. John told them about Scott and how he was considered a hero by some but he never acted like one; it was as if he had snapped. The bully just wasn't the same anymore and he became almost as morose as Jaimie was before her transition. There was something in Scott that others weren't seeing but again like Jaimie John felt something wasn't right. Mercifully after 15 minutes of almost constant questions, the seminar ended. The other panelists were still angered at John's presence, with several complaining about him stealing the focus from their children. John was still agitated and said bluntly, "I didn't want to be up here any more than you wanted me here, I was doing the doctor a favor because my daughter would want me to help her. I am sorry if you feel anger that I ended up being the focus but I never wanted it." Dr. Eliza picked up on his reaction and stated, "I asked him because I wanted someone who could offer hope if you paid attention to the other panelists like he did you would have seen the man could barely contain his sadness and grief listening to your stories. At least give him the decency of not being arrogant about this." They quieted down but still gave him sneers. Dr. Eliza thanked the four panelists and gave John a big hug, saying, "I know this took a lot out of you, thanks for doing this." John reluctantly replied, "I was really only here because I needed the credits for school." Dr. Eliza laughed and said, "I saw your name on the list; I thought it was because you were interested in this." John shook his head and said, "In all honesty, I just needed a seminar." She added, "Don't worry, you saved me tonight. I'll talk with Jaimie next appointment about her trust issues." On his way out John was met by the dean of the history department. He was giving John a big smile, finally saying, "This explains a lot, I don't blame you for needing your days clear. And thank you for jumping into the fray for Dr. Eliza, she spent a lot of time and effort setting this up." John looked at him and said, "I actually needed my afternoons clear because I can't keep going with the impending teaching practicum and dealing with the newborns. And Dr. Eliza is a good person; I couldn't leave her in a bind. My daughter would be outraged if she found out I refused her request." The dean nodded saying, "Exactly as I thought. I know you are a good person, your references said as much." The dean then added, "I took the liberty of sorting out your schedule and did some more investigating into you. It seems that you were quick to register but didn't carry over any credits. I know you attended Charlestown Community College years ago and asked on your behalf that the credits from there be transferred over. There was no problem with the registrar so you only need a few more classes to graduate. It's the least we could do for you for helping us out twice." John asked, "Twice?" He laughed saying, "Dean Zane told me about your lecture in January and your scholarships and donations are a large reason for two dozen students from your city attending school here." John smiled as he walks away. John went to bed with a huge relief off his chest. The next morning was a huge one for John; it was the first day of his practicum. He would official become a student teacher, watching inside the classroom for six weeks before he was allowed to teach on his own. The twins had been nice to John by giving him more hours of sleep but he was still up early and nervous. He got to school early, meeting his mentor Oliver Leeds for coffee. Oliver discussed the lesson plan for the next six weeks and gave John his assignment for his four-week block. John and he discussed teaching styles with Oliver being given a copy of John's tutoring classes. Oliver was impressed with his style and asked that he try to use it in class for his block. Just after 8 AM, the students started to filter into the classroom. The first class was World History which was taught to mostly sophomores. John heard several boys talking about the football field and the weather with a very familiar voice among the students. As they entered John said, "20 years and Inferno players are still complaining about the field. Some things never change." The boys stopped, looked at John and laughed. Bryan Morris shook his head and said, "Did they put you here on purpose or did we lose the lottery?" John shot back, "I asked myself the same question, I am still waiting for a reply." Bryan and his teammates burst into laughter alongside their classmates. More students trickled in with more funny looks and snickers. Finally, the last student to enter ran up to John and hugged him, saying, "You better not fail us, mom will be mad." John looked at Hannah Morris and said, "Then do the homework, study for the tests, and participate in class and you won't fail." Hannah Morris blushed and took her seat, smiling at her uncle. Mr. Leeds started off by introducing John and telling the students what will be happening over the next few months. He pointed out that any work that John gave counted towards their grade and what he taught was going to be on the midterm and final so they had to pay attention. The students asked, "Are you still going to be here while he teaches?" They were told, "I'll be in the back observing, but unless there is a problem or emergency he will be in charge. It'll be his class, not mine." The next day was the same, with John joking to the boys, "I swear, I ought to show you guys how that field used to look if you complain about it again." The boys said, "Fine, show us." John asked Bryan to bring in his mom's yearbook, with Hannah saying, "Do you really want to do that? You know what is in there." Bryan brought in the yearbook as promised and John showed the pictures of the field. The boys were surprised, John was telling the truth. One boy noticed something in the yearbook. He looked up at John then back at the picture. The boy finally asked, "Is that you?" pointing to a kid jumping around in a picture. Hannah blurted out, "That's him, and he's in the team photo. You can't miss him." John turned red, sat down as the kids crowded to see the pictures. Even Mr. Leeds looked at them. Hannah smiled and said, "Told you not to." John replied, "I have baby pictures and I know how to use them." Hannah shot back a quick, "So do I." The class burst into laughter as Mr. Leeds started the class with a big grin. John watched as Mr. Leeds and the students went back and forth over concepts and ideas. John got a feeling for the students and noted who needed some encouragement and who was fine with the material. He kept an eye on Bryan and Hannah, noting that Bryan was taking copious notes while Hannah only jotted down notes sparingly. After class, John asked to look at Hannah's notebook and saw she only copied down certain things. Hannah admitted, "It's just the same stuff over and over again that we heard in 6th and 7th grade, I'm only jotting down what is new to me." John let her go making note to ask her later if she is actually studying for tests. Bryan watched and said, "You know she doesn't even need the notes, she doesn't forget much." John nodded saying, "Yeah but it's still good to jot down more notes just in case." Hannah and John spent a lot of time going back and forth after classes. He would ask about her homework and tests knowing that if she missed anything he would know which meant her mother would know. Hannah's teachers noticed that she was doing better since John arrived and told him, "Whatever it is you are doing is working." John laughed saying, "I didn't do anything; it must be the fear of my possibly doing something that is driving her. She believes that if she misses an assignment or does badly on a test I'll know and tell her mother so she is trying harder." They giggled at that, adding, "Good, then we know who to go to if she does do that." Hannah's friends noticed John always checking on her homework. They gave her sympathy and offered to help her if needed. Hannah politely declined, saying, "If I did that Uncle John would double check your work as well." They both laughed and decided to let it rest, thankful to not have a relative who was a teacher but also jealous that she did. Chapter 3: Unwelcome Visitors Joseph Johnson, the kids' grandfather, called John a week before Columbus Day and asked if he and the kids would come out to Kansas City for the weekend. His friend Mr. Tegan asked them to attend the upcoming Royals playoff games. John looked at his pile of required class work and thought maybe he could swing some time off if he worked during the weekend. He knew Michael would like to go but Jaimie was still reluctant to go out in big crowds especially in Missouri and among people who knew her past. He asked the kids what they wanted to do. Jaimie asked if she could have time to visit her friend Jessica Nelson while Michael was happy just to see the game. John checked with Joseph who agreed to give the kids time on Saturday and Sunday so they could do what they wanted. John's mother would be staying the weekend with Valerie to help with the twins. Valerie was all too eager to have her help, Catherine Finn enjoyed her grandchildren and was more than happy to handle late night feedings and diapering while Valerie slept. For John and the kids, the flight out was boring. The kids were stuck working on schoolwork for their history teacher, Mr. Poland. John had to type up two papers by the end of the weekend so he was busy as well. Joseph met them at the airport and noted their exhaustion and drove them to his house. Evelyn Johnson greeted them with big hugs and kisses, noting how big they had gotten in the seven weeks since she last saw them. The kids winced at the attention but gave her kisses in return. The kids ate a quick dinner then fell asleep, exhausted by the busy day. John wasn't far behind, he needed sleep more than anyone. The next morning John woke up after the kids. Evelyn and Joseph were already up and feeding the kids when John came into the kitchen. He sat down quietly and dug into a plate of food as soon as it was placed in front of him. Joseph noticed his exhaustion and asked, "Did you really do night shifts with the kids?" John silently nodded as the kids laughed. After breakfast, Jaimie called Jessica to arrange a meetup. Jessica's scream was piercing causing Jaimie and the others to wince. She asked John to drive her over to Jessica's house as soon as possible, Michael reluctantly joined them but told Jaimie, "I'm not kissing her again." Jessica grabbed Jaimie into a deep hug as the three stepped out of the car. The two started gossiping away with Michael caught in between. John greeted her parents, Quentin and Greta Nelson, thanking them for allowing Jaimie to visit. Quentin assured him it was alright, saying, "She's Jessica's friend and a good person, we can't deny the two of them some time together." The kids talked while John relaxed with Greta and Quentin. They asked about the twins to which John tried his best to be nice. He admitted, "JD is quiet but Cat is a crier. The two are polar opposites. Cat is going to make my hair go gray before she turns one." Greta laughed at John's joke, loving his reaction. Quentin asked about his classwork, trying to get him to focus on something else so Greta wouldn't embarrass him too much. The three got along well, John felt bad that they couldn't interact more often. After three hours John and the kids had to leave. Jaimie said she would be back tomorrow and thanked Greta and Quentin for the last time before they left. Back at the Johnson house, the kids got dressed for the game. Michael had his favorite cap and Royals jacket while Jaimie wore a blue and white dress. Joseph wore a suit while John wore a dress shirt and slacks. At the game, they were escorted to the VIP suite where they met Mr. Tegan and the other owners. Joseph introduced the family to them with Jaimie getting lots of compliments on her dress. Mr. Tegan was quick to pull Jaimie aside and talk with her. She listened as he said her becoming a girl caused a lot of heartache for the town, many people lost their jobs and some even went to jail. Mr. Tegan tried his best to drive the point home that she caused a lot of trouble for what she did. Joseph heard the exchange and pulled Jaimie back. Joseph wasn't one to mince words and bluntly said, "It is extremely insulting to know that you used me to get at my granddaughter. You know damn well what went on in town and what happened had nothing to do with her. Your brother-in- law went to prison for his own actions, how dare you blame her for it." Mr. Tegan tried to respond but was cut off by another person. They demanded an explanation to which Joseph was all too eager to give, "Tegan was just telling my granddaughter that she is responsible for what happened in Newhall. He knows the poor girl is innocent but Tegan insists on making her feel like crap. I am ashamed that he abused your team's glory to invite us here just to confront her." Joseph and the family left. Michael didn't care about the game anymore, he was only concerned with Jaimie. John saw anger and frustration in Michael's eyes. He could no longer associate his favorite team with good things, he saw the Royals logo and got angered. The last piece of his old life was now something that he hated. Back at the Johnson home Michael and Jaimie talked alone in one of the bedrooms. Michael tearfully said, "I don't want to come back here anymore. Grandma and Grandpa are good people but it's getting too much. I can't stand the Royals anymore, I like Jessica but it's just not enough for us to come anymore." Jaimie reluctantly agreed, saying, "I love Jessica too but I don't want to always be reminded that I am different or that things changed after I changed. I'll miss her but we can't keep coming out here. It's not fair to her and it's not fair to dad." Joseph and John heard what they said. The two shared a knowing look, this was the last trip for them. Tomorrow would be the last time Jessica and Jaimie spent time together unless Jessica's family traveled east. Jaimie didn't tell Jessica what was on her mind but Jessica knew something happened the night before at the game. Jessica tried to keep her occupied but just sat down next to her. Jaimie couldn't bring herself to admit that it was the last time they may see each other, but Jessica knew. Jessica told her, "You don't have to say it, I know you won't be coming out here again. Don't feel bad, you have moved on. I hope we can come east someday and you can show us around but until then I don't mind saying goodbye." The two hugged deeply and were in tears as the family departed. John thanked Greta for their time and assured her, "You three will always be welcome in Winnisimmet." The kids rode back to the Johnson home silently. The three went to bed early and didn't say much on the plane trip back, opting to just work on their homework and papers. While John and the kids attended baseball game back in Winnisimmet Valerie and Catherine attended the high school football game. Hannah was there doing her cheers and waived at them. One of her teammates slipped causing Hannah to slip and wrench her knee awkwardly. Hannah was in pain and complained about feeling a, "Pop" in her knee. Her coach looked at her knee and shook her head, saying, "It's strained, possibly torn. You better get a doctor to look at this." Hannah wasn't happy about that. Her teammates tried to console her but she asked that they continue on without her. While her mother-in-law watched the twins Valerie came over and asked about her injury. Hannah told them the bad news to which Valerie offered to drive her home. Hannah accepted but asked that they wait until after the game as she didn't want Bryan to know. She complied but let her mother know what happened so she could call for an appointment the next day. Hannah's injury turned out to be semi-serious. Her ligament wasn't fully torn but it was enough to keep her out of action for several weeks essentially ending her season. Valerie asked how she was going to get to and from school, Hannah said she would walk but her mother refused to hear any of that. Karen demanded that John drives Hannah and take her to her physical therapy appointments which were at the same time as Jaimie's appointments in the same building. She had no choice but to agree. Valerie called John about what happened to Hannah. John told her to give a note to the school telling them what he would be doing for her. He also emailed the principal to let him know about the injury and what he needed to do for Hannah. Jake Bollinger gladly agreed to the plan and told him that if anyone had a problem with it that they should go to him and as John was already her emergency contact and a trusted relative there was no actual problem. After missing Jaimie for the weekend the other girls demanded a slumber party. For that upcoming weekend, Michael and the boys were being forced to stay away ending up at Richard's home for the weekend. John tried his best to get out of it but Jaimie insisted since it had been so long since they had one. The girls also demanded that Hannah come over, which John wasn't happy about trying to tell them, "She needs to rest her leg." The girls insisted anyway. Tuesday morning as they entered school Hannah mocked John's anxiety. She kept asking him, "You act as if you are not allowed to be my uncle anymore once you stepped into the classroom" John muttered something about appearances and left it at that. John changed the subject and mentioned the slumber party the girls were having. He also stated that he said you were too hurt to go despite the girls wanting you there. Hannah pressed John about the sleepover saying, "You have to let me, the girls want me there." John kept saying no while Bryan joked that, "This is the first time Uncle John ever tried to say no to Hannah" which got the kids laughing until John scolded him. Mr. Leeds just shook his head trying his hardest not to laugh and started class much to John's delight. By Friday it was normal to see John helping Hannah to and from school. None of the students seemed to notice or care. Any who asked what was going on were told the truth; Mr. Finn was helping his niece so she didn't have to walk to school. Hannah didn't like that she had to sometimes wait for John to finish up a page of his assignments but didn't say anything about it. That evening the girls mobbed Hannah, helping her inside while setting a big place for her downstairs. Jaimie played nurse for her cousin, getting her everything she would need while the others gave her space. Hannah tried to do things for herself but the girls wouldn't let her. When John came back after dropping off the boys Hannah begged him to go home, saying, "Jaimie is driving me crazy!" John mockingly said, "I told you so" then sternly stated, "You insisted on being here, you put up with it." The girls were pretty quiet most of the night. Just after 2 AM while John was changing JD's diaper he heard some sniffling coming from the bathroom. Knocking on the door then peeking in he saw Jenna at the sink crying with her sleeping bag and pajamas bunched on the floor. John immediately saw a red stain, and asked her, "Are you alright?" Jenna looked at him in tears and said, "I made a mess." John's face paled realizing what was going on. He pulled himself together asked her, "Your first one?" She nodded still crying. John embraced her, telling her, "It's alright. We'll get you cleaned up and call your mom later. You aren't the first girl to get caught unprepared, and you won't be the last." John admitted, "Hannah got caught the same way, at least you have your friends here and your mom is a phone call away." John grabbed his keys and drove off, returning a half hour later with the needed feminine products and took the stained items to the laundry hamper for her trying his hardest not to cringe. He apologized for his ignorance, saying, "I wish I could help you more but the only advice I can give you is what my sisters told me about Hannah- to always have chocolate on hand." She hugged John for the help and tearfully said, "Thank you." Both went back to bed. Several hours later after he woke up for breakfast John called Jenna's mother Anne Connors and told her what happened. She tried her hardest to stifle her laughter and thanked John for being there for her. Jenna was more quiet than normal during the day and the girls noticed the change. Jaimie pulled her aside and asked what was going on; Jenna could only whimper, "Girl stuff." Jaimie blushed in embarrassment as the others grabbed her in a big embrace. Stacy giggled saying, "Welcome to the club, hope you didn't traumatize Uncle John too much last night" to which the others laughed. Jenna asked, "How did you know?" Stacy pointed at the sleeping bag and her mismatched pajamas. Jenna blushed but the girls just hugged her again. Hannah admitted to the girls, "Be glad he didn't act like when I had mine. He almost had a heart attack and was shaking trying to find out what to do. Aunt Leslie came home and would not stop laughing at him. Mom finally got her to stop by telling about Grandpa's reaction to theirs." The girls all burst into laughter as Hannah rolled her eyes at the memory. Valerie watched and smiled. John had gotten an unintended fatherhood moment, one that he wasn't able to have with Jaimie but was special none the less. She hugged him, saying, "How did you know what to do?" John looked down and said one word, "Hannah." Valerie giggled and said, "Now I know why you always have that package tucked away in the cabinet." Anne stopped by that afternoon to drop off more clothes and talk with Jenna. John made himself scarce, claiming to be working on papers for class. He was really trying his hardest to avoid the inevitable embarrassment of Anne's teasing but did, in fact, do some work. Valerie told her about the preparations he had done in advance in the past, Anne let out a big laugh and said, "It's almost like he wanted this to happen." John shot back, "Have it happen once and you learn quickly not to get caught unprepared." Valerie laughed and let it slide not wanting to embarrass John further. Anne did eventually get to thank John who was still red and cringing at the constant reminders of the night before. She hugged John, saying, "Her dad would have been a wreck. The way you treat her it's like you are Uncle John. I may have to have her start calling you that." John smiled and said, "That would be fine with me, I love these girls like they are my nieces already." The girls heard him say that and agreed to do the same. John was now, "Uncle John" to all of them and would be as long as they remained friends. Anne asked the girls what they were talking about to which Courtney joked, "Just talking about Uncle John" which made her laugh and say, "I created a monster." John couldn't help but smile at the whole situation. The boys came back Sunday afternoon. They conveniently didn't ask about what went on. Will joked, "Whatever you did, we don't want to know. You kicked us out so we don't want to know what went on." Claire was quick to shoot back, "Good because we weren't going to tell you anyway." The girls all started laughing at him walking into that trap, Richard had to console him saying, "You fell for the oldest trick in the book." Courtney giggled and replied, "And you aren't being told either." In Jaimie's room, Michael and Richard were talking with Jaimie who told them, "The girls are going to call dad Uncle John from now on. Don't ask why because it's something girls don't talk about." Richard nodded saying, "I take it we are going to have to as well?" Jaimie nodded and Michael asked, "Are their parents OK with that?" Jaimie didn't know, saying, "Jenna's mom jokingly suggested it, but I don't see any of them not agreeing." Richard walked out and told Will, to which they agreed. Chapter 4: Surprises Ever since she started kindergarten Jaimie was quick to change out of her clothes when she returned home from school. She had a nasty habit of forgetting to close her bedroom door, though. It was a lingering holdover from her foster care days when she would play dress-up with the girls. After getting caught several times in their clothes the girls were sent away and Jaimie was forced to always keep the door open. Despite being taken into John's care, after a year and a half, Jaimie is still unintentionally leaving the door open. Normally this isn't a problem, as Michael and John had known to slow down and wait a minute or two before entering the house to give her time to change. This day, however, Richard was in desperate need of the bathroom and rushed inside and upstairs. Literally two seconds after he rushed inside John and Michael heard two screams. They rushed inside and saw Richard was frozen in place with a scared look and full blush on his face. Jaimie slammed her door shut and was on the verge of tears. John told Michael to check on Jaimie as he attended to Richard. The poor boy was scared stiff; managing just a mumbled, "I'm so sorry I didn't mean to see her naked." John told him in a quiet voice, "It's not your fault. We told her dozens of times to close her door but she can't seem to break that bad habit." Richard was still scared and tried to say, "I never wanted this to happen. Please don't be mad at me." John led him to the kitchen and sat him down so he could calm down. Michael was furious. Jaimie had calmed down and changed but was too frightened to leave her room. She could hear Michael's near growling and Richard's whimpering. Michael blamed Richard for this whole situation, running into the room with his fists balled to confront him. John sensed his anger and told him, "If you don't calm down go to your room until I tell you to come out." Michael lunged after Richard; John grabbed his arm and pulled him away. Michael started swearing at Richard, calling him, "Pervert" and, "Peeping tom" among other names as he was dragged away. Richard started crying hard. He was losing his best friend and girlfriend in a span of a minute. John returned to Richard, saying, "I know you didn't mean this, give her some time to process what happened. You are her boyfriend and she wasn't ready for you to see her like that. This wasn't your fault. You aren't in trouble, she knows she screwed up. The best thing you can do is give her space. Whatever you do, don't tell anyone you saw her like that. It'll make things worse and you may not like what is said about you by others." Richard nodded, and said, "Please tell her that I am sorry and that I think she is beautiful no matter what anyone says." John shook his head and said, "That's the best thing you could have said." Jaimie poked her head out and heard what John and Richard were saying. Richard's last statement made her run to him, giving him a big hug and kiss on the lips. She apologized over and over again to him in quick succession. Michael popped his head out and tried to say something nasty, only to be cut off by John who said, "Open your mouth and you don't leave your room for a week." Michael muttered, "I'll get you back in school." Jaimie shot back, "And you will lose all of your friends and Courtney as well. It's not his fault, leave him alone!" Michael was true to his word and confronted Richard the next morning. Will held him back and told him to take a walk with the girls dragging him away. Richard was pestered by Will to reveal what happened between the two, he would only say, "I promised I wouldn't tell." Jaimie pulled Will aside and told him bluntly, "He accidentally saw me naked when I left my door open. Tell anyone else what I just told you and you will never get a date or hang out with another person in this or any other school." He looked at Richard and saw him looking down in shame. She was telling the truth. Will agreed to stay quiet preferring to not lose his friendships or potential girlfriends. Michael kept at it for the next several days. He was openly hostile towards Richard and was all but ignored by everyone in class. Even if they didn't know the details they knew that Michael was in a bad mood for a reason and to let the group work it out. Their teachers took notice and tried to ask what was going on, Richard would only say, "It's personal and we are just waiting for Michael to calm down before it is over with." They asked that they solve it quickly before they called their parents. It took another few days and a lot of talking with the girls for Michael to finally cool off. The girls knew about Jaimie's habit and always made sure that she closed the door, but Michael never told the boys. They explained why she did it and why he needed to help her break the habit; Michael was reluctant to listen but finally gave in when Courtney had a heart to heart with him. She reasoned with him saying, "You didn't want to see your sister as a young woman and Richard is your best friend so Richard dating Jaimie and seeing her nude was the biggest jump into womanhood she had made in your eyes so far." Michael admitted that this scared him, she was his best friend and he was losing her to someone else. Courtney countered that by saying he was doing the same to Jenna, she was her best friend for years until she and Michael started to get close. Jenna didn't want to lose her but she felt it was worth losing some time with her to keep her friendship and gain his. Michael leaned in and kissed her. The two embraced for several minutes until Jenna and the other girls broke them up. Michael admitted, "You are right; I don't want to lose her to him." The girls asked what he meant, Courtney only said, "He realized she is growing up, he just needed to hear it for himself." Jenna admitted, "I don't mind losing you to him; I know you and I are still friends even if we aren't always together." Courtney mumbled, "He needed to learn the same lesson." Michael walked over to Richard who tried to move away. Michael lowered his head and blurted out, "I'm sorry. It wasn't your fault and you didn't deserve the flak I gave you. I don't want to lose my best friend to a boy yet, but it's too late. I'd rather lose her to my best friend than someone else." Richard and Michael hugged while the girls looked on. Will walked over and pretended nothing had happened between the two and went about their normal routines. Jaimie talked with Dr. Eliza about the door habit. She told her about Richard's and Michael's reactions, her friends' reactions, and her dad's reaction. Dr. Eliza summed it up by saying, "Everyone saw you as a young lady except your brother. He had known you longer than anyone else and didn't want to lose you as a friend, he knows you are female but to him, you are still that little buddy he played with in the playground. It scares him that you are both growing up and have people who love you in new ways. He will come around, he just needs time. I am assuming Courtney told him the same judging by his sudden turnaround after their talk." Jaimie nodded and talked about something else. Before Jaimie left Dr. Eliza mentioned that Jaimie needs to remind herself that her family loves her no matter what and won't send her away, so she didn't need to keep a door open. Jaimie agreed. The month flew by after the Richard/Michael drama. The kids decided to split up and do multiple things on Halloween. The boys would hang out with Dan Lopez. The girls went to the city's Halloween party at the middle school. John got stuck taking Rebecca, Jessie, and the twins trick or treating. Melanie Lopez dropped the twins and Rebecca off at the high school making the twins an instant celebrity with the students. The teachers had already seen the twins when John met for orientation and at Bryan's games. Seeing Rebecca dressed up Jake Bollinger asked if he was taking the girls out. John admitted, "I lost the coin flip with her father; he gets to take the boys out bowling." Several students saw the twins and came over to John to ask about them. The duo tried their best to get moving but had to stop every few seconds as more people wanted to see the twins. The twins loved the attention with JD doing his best dribbling and cooing. Cat got jealous of his attention and noisily demanded a new diaper. Hannah was embarrassed with the attention, especially when John asked if she was going to the dance that night. She tried to use her knee as an excuse but her friends wouldn't let her say no and the boys were genuinely interested in dancing with her. John said, "It's better than sitting at home doing your homework." Rebecca told her bluntly, "Just go. You don't have a reason not to." After changing Cat's diaper the girls were still oohing at the twins. Rebecca asked, "Am I going to have to go through this for the next few years?" John laughed and said, "If you are lucky." Rebecca rolled her eyes at the thought but John said, "How do you think your sister felt when you were born? She went through this already. People like babies." The four met up with Rebecca's friends Jessie, Amy, and Kelly. Rebecca and the girls strutted for each other when they met up. The girls were dressed as princesses; it was the theme this year with Stacy and Claire coordinating with the girls. Jaimie loved her pink frilly dress, wearing it several times before the party much to the annoyance of John and Michael. As usual, the girls coordinated their colors so they all matched yet were unique. The twins were quiet and slept most of the time. Cat enjoyed the time out, giving her dad a rare chance to unwind while the girls enjoyed their trick or treating. John joked that this was going to be an annual event for the next 15 years, longer if Melanie had more kids. The girls laughed but Rebecca gave him a glare that instantly sent chills through him, she didn't think it was funny. After an hour and two bags of candy, each the girls got tired and John drove home. He dropped Rebecca and the twins off with his mother and went to pick up Hannah at the school. John watched the students enjoying the dance before grabbing Hannah's attention. The students were happy to see him but were disappointed that the twins weren't with him. John laughed and said, "I'd be a bad father if I kept them out at this hour. All of the kids are home." Hannah was relieved to be going, her knee was throbbing and she needed help walking out. The other students held the doors for her but she needed to lean on John for support. She was embarrassed, John assured her that she was fine and nobody would make fun of her for being hurt. The next morning the twins were the talk of the school. Kids were asking John about Rebecca mistaking her as his other daughter. John tried his best to explain, "She's my niece" with Hannah explaining, "She's dad's best friend's daughter, they are practically brother/sister so it's just easier to consider her and her sister as our cousins than explain everything." The kids were asking for pictures of the twins, John immediately regretted not having some made up yet. He hadn't had the time to take them yet. As it was a Friday the kids were a little more anxious than normal to get the class over with. Just before the end of class, Mr. Leeds gave them a bombshell: Monday morning Mr. Finn would be taking over the class for the next month. The kids were handed a form to read, sign, and have their parents sign. The kids asked why it was needed looking around confused and surprised. Mr. Leeds stated, "Mr. Finn will be recording the classes as an experiment for the school. It is also so he and I can see what changes need to be made to his teaching style that I am not able to catch from my own observations. There will be two cameras, one always pointed at the front and one always pointed at the back. If you choose not to sign or your parents refuse to allow you to participate in this experiment you will not be allowed inside the classroom while the cameras are on and will be given a copy of the day's video to watch at home. You will be responsible for submitting the day's required work by the start of the next class." The kids looked around at each other and signed the forms. All signed except one. Hannah asked, "Will my brother and I need to sign?" Mr. Leeds expected her question and said, "Yes, even if it is pointless." John explained to the students, "I always record my classes so I know where to make improvements. I know you don't like the idea but consider this: would you rather have a class where you actually learn something new or have another class teaching the same stuff over again?" The kids had to take several minutes to think, Mr. Leeds looked at John and almost burst into laughter. He quietly said, "This is the longest they have thought about something in the class all year. You stumped them." The kids all agreed that it was for their benefit. One student, Albert Clarence, bluntly said, "My mother won't sign this. She doesn't want anything to do with any Finn." Mr. Leeds told him exactly what would happen to him if the form wasn't returned signed but Albert ignored it. John apologized to him for his impending boredom but he would not change what was going to happen for him. He would be given the chance to view the video of the day's class afterward and expected to keep up with the work but otherwise, he would be cut off from the class. Mr. Leeds told John, "Don't worry about him; there is always one of those students in class." Chapter 5: Major Trouble John's first day of teaching solo started great. The students seemed to take to his unique style fairly quickly. He was concept-based as opposed to being straight out of the textbooks like all other teachers, spending his time lecturing rather than looking at maps and pictures. He picked the major topics for the chapters, removed the fluff, and talked about what they needed to know instead of going over everything that could possibly be covered. He still assigned definitions and questions from the chapter reviews like the other teachers to assure that the kids were reading but his classes were more interactive more fun. The kids liked John's style. Word spread quickly among the students, other teachers started to take notice with three of the history teachers asking opinions on their own teaching. John was a hit. His students liked that he listened to their opinions and added their thoughts to his notes. Jake Bollinger received several compliments from the parents, a few asking if the school had considered keeping John yet. As much as Jake wanted to say yes to that question he could only say, "It's too early to tell." That wasn't a lie as John still had a long way to go before he earned his license. He did, however, have a big leap towards earning a job at the school if/when he did. By John's second Wednesday he was making great strides in his lessons. He was ahead of where he needed to be regarding the curriculum. Mr. Leeds was proud to throw in some additional work to ease his own workload much to John's pleasure. This Wednesday was out of the ordinary. John came into school with Hannah as normal but was pulled aside by Jake. He had a serious look on his face, saying, "Please come with me." John followed without question. This was serious, John didn't need the whole story to know trouble was brewing. John's hands started shaking in anticipation of the worst. Several students saw this and started to ask what was going on. The rumor mill started running on high before John had even reached the main office. Hannah quickly texted her brother and Aunt Valerie informing them of trouble. As soon as she sent her texts Hannah was approached by the vice principal and two men wearing suits. The vice principal told her to come with them and not make a scene. Hannah texted her Aunt Valerie again this time saying, "Officers questioning me about Uncle John I need your help fast." Once inside Jake's office behind closed and locked doors, he informed John that there was a serious allegation of misconduct leveled against him. John asked what he was talking about, and was given a written statement from Albert Clarence, one of his students. John looked at the name, then said, "I don't recognize the name, are you sure he is one of mine?" John then thought of the permission slip incident 11 days before. He must be the boy who refused to sign the forms. John told Jake what he thought the name might mean. Jake Bollinger cocked his head, asking what the meant. John showed him his grade book and notes about each student. Albert Clarence's name wasn't on it. Jake was aware of one student who was in the class but not part of John's teaching. He looked at John and asked, "Does this date mean anything?" showing him a specific date mentioned by the student. John grabbed his laptop and looked at the calendar, then said, "Hannah had a doctor's appointment that day that her mother took her to. I marked her as excused in my book and you should have the copy of the note in the files." Jake gave the information to his secretary who produced the note as well as the school's prior written approval. She was confirmed as being absent on the day in question. Jake looked at John's footage from the day in question and confirmed her absence, noting that Bryan mentioned exactly what was going on. Thinking for a second Jake put 2 and 2 together. He looked at John and said, "I think we might have a sticky situation. I suggest you let us handle things from here. You have proven beyond a doubt that you are completely innocent; I want to give you a little distance while we put our plan into action." John produced a note that he had previously written and said, "I feared this would happen so take this and I'll be on my way." John handed the paper over, gathered his things, and left. Jake read the paper and tried to reason with him but John had already left. Jake was fuming. He told his secretary, "Get the city solicitor on the phone; we have a big situation that he needs to handle. And get me Bryan Morris; I have a job for him to do." Within minutes Jake was talking with the lawyer who was informed of the situation and agreed to assist. He then had Bryan enter. He was told what happened and who was involved. Bryan recognized the name of the accuser, telling Jake he was going to, "To set up something special." Jake tried to tell him not to hurt him but Bryan bluntly said, "No, we are going to do something much worse. We are going to let him hang himself." During lunch, Bryan had a talk with several friends. The boys called over Pete Orleans to have a word with them. Bryan called in the favor that Pete owed his sister, recalling the insulting remarks about Jaimie 13 months before. Pete was all ears. Once Pete heard Hannah was involved he agreed to help out, saying, "I'd do anything for her" unintentionally revealing this was more than just a simple favor. Bryan smiled a knowing smile. Pete didn't need to say anything more about her, the boy was clearly smitten with Hannah. With the plan in place, the boys looked over at Albert Clarence sitting alone in the cafeteria nodding in agreement. Pete walked over to him and asked, "Did you hear about Mr. Finn? He got accused of doing nasty things with one of the girls!" Albert looked up and smiled, saying, "Is that so?" They talked for several minutes, with Albert adding things like, "The police were told, the DA was told, hell the principal kicked him out. Serves him right, mom said he deserves to go to jail. She said it was payback for what his wife did to her last year, that his so-called 'daughter' deserved to be put away. She said that we are going to be heroes for getting rid of him." Pete asked, "Is any of it true?" Albert laughed saying, "She made the whole thing up. She said nobody would believe him, nobody ever believes teachers accused of doing that to a student!" The boys left quickly, going right to the principal's office and handing over a digital recorder. Jake listened to what was said and smiled. Albert and his mother were in for a big shock. The boys were excused and told to not tell anyone what was going on. Bryan swore them to secrecy as well, under penalty of broken jaws. At the same time Jake was frantically making phone calls and talking with Bryan, Hannah was being talked to by two police officers. She received a text from her aunt that said, "Don't say anything until I get there" which she quickly relayed to the officers. They tried every which way to get her to speak, Hannah cut them off by only saying, "I refuse to speak until my lawyer is present." They kept telling her she didn't need one, Hannah simply said the same thing. After a half hour, Valerie showed up with the twins in tow as they were right in the middle of explaining again that she didn't need a lawyer. Valerie got down to business and asked Hannah, "Did you say anything?" She said, "No, they kept saying I didn't need you and that I wasn't in trouble. I didn't buy it." Valerie scolded them and bluntly stated, "Give me your names and identification numbers. I don't like it when my clients are badgered with false advice by officers trying to make a case especially when the client is a juvenile. Your superiors will be informed and the state notified of your actions." The officers tried to backtrack but Valerie cut them off saying, "Don't try to bullshit me, I know my client better than you two ever will. If she said you tried to get her to talk without my being here then you did. Now start talking." The two handed over their information and listened as Valerie called her office to have them file the complaint. When she was finished the two officers started asking questions about Hannah's relationship with John. They asked about the rides and their classroom banter. They asked about what the two did outside of class. Valerie and Hannah realized what was happening and let them ask their questions. Hannah finally got bored and in true Hannah fashion asked, "Should we tell them or let them continue to look like idiots?" Valerie burst into laughter and said, "I can't take anymore, just tell them." Hannah looked the two of them straight in their eyes and said, "You two are either the worst detectives or total idiots. Do you have any idea who John Finn is? HE'S MY UNCLE! As in my mother's brother. Morris is my FATHER'S name. If you had any idea what you are doing as detectives a simple search of school records would have shown my mother's name is FINN, not MORRIS!" They tried to backtrack and say, "But that is wholly inappropriate behavior for a teacher." Hannah bluntly said, "No it isn't. Mom told the school that I needed rides to and from school due to my injury and that Uncle John would be doing the driving. She submitted the statement along with Uncle John emailing Mr. Bollinger ahead of time. As to the banter, that is how we and Uncle John have always talked since I first learned how to talk. The whole family does that with each other. And as to outside of class, Uncle John helps me with homework whenever I have trouble and ensures that I am doing all the assigned work for all of my classes. My teachers have told me that they will inform him if I don't do my work and he has stated that he will relay that information to my mother getting me into trouble. He has been doing that since kindergarten. There is nothing inappropriate going on, whoever gave you that has no idea what the hell they are talking about." Valerie asked if they knew about the cameras in the classroom. The two officers looked at her funny, clearly unaware. Hannah bluntly said, "You never saw the footage of that day, did you? It's the easiest way to prove if anything happened and if I was in school, and I know damn well that I wasn't." Valerie produced the footage via her laptop, showing that Hannah wasn't there, therefore, the incident never happened. The two officers tried to reason that it could have occurred elsewhere but were shot down by Valerie saying, "So you are now trying to create a crime based on nothing more than a claim that was beyond a doubt proven false. Please, continue. We already have more than enough reason to have you fired now you are working on harassment charges." The two officers excused themselves, made a quick phone call, and tried to leave. Valerie stopped them saying, "I know you just tried to call the DA's office. That won't do any good, I informed them exactly what we were going to say and they have everything we just showed you and more. As soon as you return to your office you will be notified by the chief of police that the investigation is over and that the claimant is to be arrested but not by you. This is being handled by the state police since your department has shown it is not yet able to handle this kind of investigation on its own. Valerie received a text which she then disclosed the contents of with a big smile, "My office worked fast. You two gentlemen will find that you have been suspended pending a hearing to which you will answer why you continuously tried to force a minor who demanded representation to talk without a lawyer. I suggest you find yourself good representation because your department is already under fire after July's incident and this will only cause more heads to roll the first of which will be yours." They left in a hurry. Hannah turned to Valerie and said, "Uncle John is going to be a wreck. You better get to him before he does something stupid." Hannah hugged her and said, "Thanks for being there for us." Valerie could only say, "That's why you hired me in the first place." Hannah could only smile at her. Hannah waited for Jake to come in and retrieve her. He told her, "Your aunt worked fast, she got everything against your uncle tossed out and got a written apology from the city before the ink was dried on the order." Hannah said, "She has access to the videos same as you do, and she knows my schedule same as uncle does. They never had a chance. You don't mess with her family, I have only seen her do this once and the person who tried to do it ended up in prison." She looked at Jake with a furious look saying, "I hope whoever did this gets what they deserve." Jake laughed and said, "Already taken care of, they are just waiting on her." Hannah was excused from classes for the day but stuck around for the upcoming show. She knew Bryan had something special planned and Jake told her she might want to see it. Bryan joined her in the principal's office with a huge grin, telling her, "Uncle John will hate us for this but it's for his own good." While the kids were awaiting Bryan's surprise Valerie was talking with Melanie outside the middle school building. Valerie was still outraged at what happened with a fire in her eyes that wouldn't stop. Melanie was doing her hardest to keep her calm as well as keep the twins entertained. Several minutes before the last bell rang three uniformed state troopers approached one of the other parents. She was asked, "Are you, Penelope Clarence?" The short, fat woman said yes then was handed several sheets of paper as one trooper said, "You have been served. You are hereby barred from all Winnisimmet schools as well as being in contact with John, Jaimie, Michael or Valerie Finn or Bryan or Hannah Morris. You are also under arrest for filing a false police report as well as making false statements to court officials." Valerie and the other parents looked on with huge grins. She was the most hated parent in the city, one that had alienated everyone over the past year with her constant anti-Jaimie complaints. At least one parent burst into laughter, cheering as she was led away in handcuffs. Her son Reed was led out of school in humiliation, saying, "Mom you idiot" as he was taken to an awaiting cruiser where he was told, "Due to your father working we have to hold you until your mom makes bail." He started to cry, saying, "Mom you went too far this time!" Melanie asked, "So, satisfied now?" Valerie shook her head and said, "Not unless John's reputation is repaired. They ruined it with a simple lie, you can't repair it easily." Anne asked, "Did they say who the alleged victim was?" Valerie mumbled, "They didn't have to. They tried to talk with Hannah and nobody else; it doesn't take a rocket scientist to see it was her they pinned it on." Anne burst into laughter, asking, "How long did it take for them to realize she was his niece or that she wasn't one to mess with?" Valerie shook her head saying, "They didn't do their homework." Valerie started to feel better after Anne's defense. Anne was trying her hardest not to laugh her tail off. Back in the high school, Jake called an emergency announcement. Every teacher and student were told to watch the in-class TVs. Every TV in the school was turned on and the PA system for the school piped in the audio from the announcement. Jake came on screen and said in an official voice, "This morning a serious accusation was made against one of our teachers. Mr. John Finn was accused of inappropriate behavior with a student. As is protocol we informed the appropriate authorities and removed Mr. Finn from the classroom pending review. That review didn't last long, though; he was proven to be innocent and was cleared of all claims within seconds." Hundreds of gasps and jeers were heard throughout the school. He paused to take a breath. "As many of you know, Mr. Finn added cameras to the classroom he was teaching in. He also had every student and parent sign a consent form, with any parent or student who refused to sign being removed from class and given alternative work for the duration of his teaching cycle. The video from those cameras was meant for several reasons. First was for a review of teaching techniques and class reactions, this was to allow for Mr. Finn and his mentor teachers to evaluate and adapt the classwork to improve your classroom experience. The most important reason, one that Mr. Finn was fearful might happen, came into play today. It was to show exactly what happened during the time Mr. Finn was in class. With two cameras everything in the classroom is visible so any inappropriate activity would be caught." Jake paused to let that sink in then continued, "The student who made the accusation was the only student whose parents refused to sign the consent form. He was never in the same room as Mr. Finn while he was teaching and after a quick review of the footage from the day in question, there was no inappropriate activity as the alleged victim was absent from school. Thus Mr. Finn was cleared of everything." He smiled and began again, "The parent and student who made the accusations did so under penalty of perjury, signing statements and a police report attesting that their claims were true. We handed over the evidence to the DA who has decided to file charges against the accusers. The parent is also being barred from all schools in this city and the student is immediately expelled. They won't be able to harm our school anymore." He all but screamed, "I will not accept any form of false accusations to be permitted. Making one makes others reluctant to come forward when some actual inappropriate behavior occurs. Mr. Finn took precautions but others are not so lucky. This is no laughing matter; Mr. Finn would be in jail if he had not taken precautions to prevent such an incident." Jake calmed down and started again, "I am now heading to Mr. Finn's house to ask that he come back. He is distraught over the claims and tendered his resignation. He would rather give up his dream job than risk the school or any other teacher being tainted by his name. I won't accept that resignation, I refuse to even consider the idea of accepting it. I will not let our school lose the best damn teacher I have ever seen. With all due respect to your teachers Mr. Finn is unique and as someone who has known him since he was a freshman in this very school he is the best person to ever set foot inside a classroom." Jake got serious saying, "Not if but WHEN he does come back I ask that you give him space and leave him be, the man has gone through a hell nobody should ever have endured. He will need time to get the fire back and be the teacher he is born to be. Thank you." Bryan appeared on the screen and started to speak saying, "Many of you know it but for those who don't John Finn is my uncle and has been the sole male figure in my sister and my lives since our father died. He gave up a lot to ensure that mom could work and have someone at home to look after us. He has been there for us no matter what, helping us with homework, cooking, cleaning, and keeping us entertained." Tears started to well up but he composed himself. "Uncle John and Hannah share a special bond that people won't understand. She has always been a 'daddy's girl' and without a dad, that fell on Uncle John. She is different around him, just as many of you girls are around your fathers. They joke a lot with each knowing how to get barbs in on the other without crossing the line. You saw the closeness when he was driving her to and from school and talking before and after class. That wasn't odd or out of line, that was Hannah and Uncle John being normal." He started to get angry now saying, "I know many of you know that because he has been there with us since we started school. He was there to pick us up from school or drop us off whenever mom couldn't. He was there to take us to events and visits to friends. He did nothing odd, just because he teaches here doesn't change who he is to us. He is Uncle John. Bryan was shouting now, "He didn't deserve what Albert Clarence did to him, he is the best teacher this school has and he is the best dad you could ever want. Albert was poisoned by his mother's hatred and jealousy of what our family has, someone who loves us and cares about us and will go out of his way to help us. He would do the same for any of you. We students mean the world to him, he has all the money he could ever want yet he goes to college and is trying to become a teacher. Not for him but for us.! He is guilty of one thing: being a great person and anyone who thinks otherwise needs to look deep and hard at themselves because it is the honest truth." Bryan ran out of breath and Jake called him away. The announcement ended and the students left the school in a collective silence. True to his word Jake went right to John's house and gave him the official apology from the city and demanded that he return to class. John tried to refuse but Valerie scolded him saying, "If you quit you let her win." Jaimie and Michael both demanded that he return, saying, "You are a fool if you quit, dad." John had tears in his eyes and agreed to return. Jake embraced him saying, "If you didn't return we would have had the entire staff tender their resignations. If it could happen to you it could happen to them. You are one of us, and you aren't alone anymore." John returned to school the next day to a hero's welcome. He was quieter than normal, though, not engaging the students but still going about his lesson. Hannah and Bryan told the others to leave him alone, that it'll take a while before he is feeling better. Mr. Leeds pitched in to help, saying, "Anyone who can go through what you did and not be changed is not someone I want to know." Hannah stuck close to her uncle but started to give distance when boys started to talk with her. Bryan told her about the boy who got the confession, Pete. He was proud to mention that he had a crush on Hannah. He talked with her, saying, "I hope this makes up for last year." Hannah smiled and said, "It more than made up for it. I owe you. You finally got past those other idiots, for me." He blushed and Bryan nudged him, Pete blurted out, "Will you do me the honor of going out to dinner?" Hannah snickered and gave him a big, "Yes" as she hugged him. Bryan shook his head and said, "You better have a helmet; you are in for a bumpy ride Pete." Hannah groaned and walked off with Pete, making plans for the weekend. Chapter 6: Saying Goodbye John kept himself mostly cloistered in the teacher's lounge in between classes. He was extremely busy with his college classes and barely had any time nowadays for other things. Valerie took a strong role with the twins, giving him more leeway to get his work done. She insisted that he get her some help, so he hired his mother to assist. She enjoyed her time with the twins, missing the fun of little kids. The twins loved her as well; they were calm and playful whenever she was with them. The following Monday John got an urgent phone call at school. Mr. Leeds took over while took the call, with the students trying their hardest to pay attention while wondering what the problem was. John returned and asked for Hannah and Bryan to come with him. He had a distressed look; the twins didn't like what they saw. They expected the worst. Outside John broke the news that their grandmother had a stroke and a heart attack. She was dying and at her request, they needed to get to the hospital to say their goodbyes. The twins embraced John, both now crying. Mr. Leeds gathered their items and sent them off, explaining to the class what was going on. The students understood, offering their sympathies. He started class again but the mood was somber. Down in the main office, John tried calling his sisters and aunt. He got through to Valerie and Melanie, letting them know what was happening. They got Anne to babysit the babies while Valerie picked up Michael and Jaimie. John and the twins made it to the hospital in under a half hour, followed close behind by Leslie and Karen Finn and Catherine Finn's sister Victoria and brother-in-law Jorge Castillo. The four kids embraced their grandmother and offered their goodbyes with her telling them she loved them deeply and how she wished she could see them grow. Jaimie tried hard not to show emotion but broke down, crying into her grandmother's lap. Michael couldn't say anything, just silently hugged grandma with tears flowing. The twins tried to look mature but broke down seeing Jaimie and Michael cry. The four surrounded her bed as she passed on, bursting into combined tears. John took the kids home. Valerie and Karen would make the arrangements while Leslie would look after the twins. Melanie stopped over to look in on John who was sitting alone in the living room. She kept trying to get him to let loose his sadness but John was stoic, trying not to break down. Jaimie and Michael joined him on the couch, finally saying, "You need to let loose Dad, it's not healthy." John couldn't fight it anymore, bursting into tears looking at Jaimie's sad face. Michael hugged him, crying alongside his father. Melanie slowly crept away leaving them, giving them their space. John went to school the next day with renewed vigor that was missing the last two weeks. John went through his routine and finished faster than he ever had, giving the students time to finish uncompleted work. The students tried their hardest to avoid the elephant in the room but finally, they had enough. Hannah's friend Paige Seville asked, "How can you be here today? Your mother just passed away and you are back to normal? How is that possible?" John took a second and said, "I promised my mother I wouldn't let my life affect my job or my students. I am keeping my word to her by doing my job. She would be disappointed if I didn't come in today and give you the best education you could get from me." The students were pleased with his response. Mr. Leeds smiled at having the old John was back. Jake came in after class and asked him the same question, John told him the actual story saying, "My wife and sisters have everything in order and thought I would be better off keeping my mind occupied here than moping at home." Jake asked how John did in class, and hearing how John performed nodded saying, "Guess they were right." Karen was a master planner and got the word out among their relatives, those who were still talking to them, about their mom's death. She got replies from most of the cousins that they couldn't attend the services due to scheduling issues but sent their sympathies. Karen snorted in disgust, "In other words, they don't actually care enough to bother." Valerie asked about that, receiving a stilted, "Victoria poisoned the wells." Valerie recalled their cringe-worthy visit the previous April, shaking her head saying, "That woman must have it in for Jaimie. If they have a problem with her gender issues then so be it but at least be honest." Leslie nodded in agreement as Valerie tried to hold back her anger. Karen offered a different view, "She looks down on our side of the family. She has hated our dad since he rejected her advances and fell in love with mom. Since then we are never good enough for her or the other cousins. John's wealth and prosperity is an abnormality, we were dirt poor and still seen as white trash by them even now." Valerie asked what she meant, getting a simple, "They had money, we didn't. Grandma and grandpa worked hard but never had much. Their store did well but didn't do enough to pay for private education and vacation homes. Their parents made thousands more. They lived in the rich suburbs and had the best schools and college educations while we had Winnisimmet schools and public colleges." Leslie stated she needed to talk with Valerie. She told her, "You need someone to look after the twins so you can work; I think I am finally ready to quit my job so I want to look after them." Valerie was stunned. She stared into her face seeing she was serious. Valerie asked, "Why the sudden change?" Leslie replied, "You need help and my job is a dead end. It's the perfect time to end it. Valerie wanted to cry. She was doing something selfless for her kids; she couldn't say no. Leslie added, "I won't take no for an answer. You need help. You let mom watch them, I am no different." Valerie hugged her but added, "Talk with John first. We will set up something." Leslie agreed and gave her notice to work. John returned from school and was greeted with the news from Leslie. He saw her serious face and asked, "When is your last day and how much do you want to earn?" Valerie raised an eyebrow; John said, "There is no changing her mind. Not even Bryan can get her to change her mind when she has that face." Leslie filled him in on the details then hugged him for accepting. Valerie and she went over the twins' schedules and set up a workable system giving John plenty of time to them while the other two were off duty or working. Catherine Finn's wake was held on Friday evening. John's family all attended. John's brother Roland was absent but was informed about the death, he took the news extremely hard trying to commit suicide. Thankfully he was in the right place for support. He had months to go on his forced rehab and this set him back further. Melanie and Dan were present as were all the kids and their parents. Catherine was a surrogate grandmother to them, they loved her and she loved them. Her death hit them hard, particularly Jenna whose own grandmother had disowned her mom after supporting Jaimie. The babies were the only people not present; a friend of Karen and Leslie graciously volunteered to watch them for the family. Just after the services started an entourage from the high school came in. John's coworkers gave their respects and offered their condolences to the family. John asked Jake why they had come, getting a simple, "I told you that you are one of us now" reply. John thanked them for coming while Bryan and Hannah trying their hardest not to be noticed joining the other kids in a corner. They were left alone by the adults who were letting them grieve in their own way. Leslie, Melanie, and Karen chatted with many of the teachers sharing stories about their times in the school especially ones with their now deceased and retired teachers. Melanie, in particular, got laughs when she had John recall certain fun antics their classmates had. John started to open up and laugh alongside her breaking the tension he had built up for the last few days. John's uncle Jorge came by with an entourage of several of his closest friends and relatives. John gave him a deep hug and thanked the entourage in Spanish and English. Jorge gave Jaimie a big hug and kiss while telling her, "Keep an eye on your daddy, he needs you." Towards the end of the service, more people showed up. The infamous Victoria Williams came in with several of the cousins and paid her respects but ignored the family. She stared at Jaimie in the corner as she was talking with cousins. Victoria looked disgusted. She whispered something but only got a puzzled look back. John's Aunt Victoria, the old cousin's namesake, noticed she was staring at Jaimie and was clearly whispering about her. She walked over to Victoria and told her bluntly, "If you are going to continue to badmouth my great-niece please just leave, Victoria. Catherine would be horrified that you would dishonor her memory at her wake by insulting her beloved granddaughter." Victoria looked at her as if she was shocked and said, "Watch your tone young lady." The younger Victoria bluntly said, "No. this is neither the time nor the place to spew your hatred. You have no right to badmouth my sister's granddaughter at her wake, so please leave." The rest of the family heard the ruckus. Karen and Leslie stood by their aunt ready for trouble adding, "Mom wanted you to be here out of love for you despite all you had done to her, but she would have no problem if you were asked to leave for insulting Jaimie so please leave now." Victoria was getting angry and blurted out, "You dare talk to me that way? Am I not allowed to talk bad about your precious abomination? She doesn't belong here. She isn't blood and isn't family. That thing should be thrown out on the street alongside the rest of the garbage in this terrible city." Dan Lopez jumped up and walked over, putting his hand on her shoulder and not so politely saying, "If you say one more bad thing about my little niece there will be two funerals held tomorrow. The ladies asked you to leave, so please leave." Victoria got up and left, saying, "This was your last chance to remain part of the family and get rid of that abomination and you blew it." Dan countered fast with, "The Finns are part of a better family, one that is stronger than blood. These fine people are about love and compassion, something you clearly lack. You may be related to each other but you are hardly family to them. We are." Anne, Olivia and her husband Richard Samuels Sr. Gabby Lawrence, and Lilly Peterson all stepped forward alongside Dan to reiterate his point, each grinning widely. Jorge's friends and family did the same, with Jorge telling Victoria, "I told you long ago that it doesn't mean you aren't family because you aren't blood. You insulted my great niece, defy my wife, and dishonor the memory of my dearly departed sister-in-law in a span of a few minutes. You are no family to us, you have never been." Victoria tried to say something but Dan carefully grabbed her shoulder and, "Escorted" her out of the room. Victoria's entourage followed close behind with all them not even bothering to look at the deceased or the family. Loud cheers came up from the teachers, several of whom admonished Victoria for being so childish and insulting. John tried to apologize for his relative's antics but none of them would hear it. More than one said, "There is nothing to apologize for, that lady deserved what she got." John pulled Dan aside and asked, "What was that about?" Dan laughed and said, "The kids and their parents are here because we are all family. We care about you, we care about the kids, and we support one another. You are among family, not just among friends. You should know better than anyone that you don't have to be related to be family. You are closer to me than my own family was, and I love you like one despite our differences. We are family, John." Jaimie and the kids watched the commotion and listened to Dan's speech. She thought about what he said, the man who had initially disliked her stood up for her in front of a crowd of people and made her feel special. She felt loved. She felt like she was among family, not just with her father, mother, and brother but a real family. Rebecca noticed her contemplation and said, "Dad is right, we are family. Blood doesn't matter when you have people who love you for what you are." She hugged her and said, "Our dads must be saying the same thing; I can see Aunt Melanie smiling at Uncle Dan as he talks to dad." Saturday morning there was a small funeral service. Catherine didn't want anything special, just her immediate family. John thought it over and decided this included all of the parents and kids. They paid their last respects and placed flowers on the casket as it was lowered into the ground. Jaimie and Michael were quiet for the rest of the weekend, not letting their parents out of their sight from the time they woke up until they fell asleep. John told them, "This is your first taste of death; it never gets easier. Just remember the good times and the pain will fade." Jaimie corrected him, "It's not for me." John hugged her and apologized, trying to avoid bringing up painful memories but Jaimie insisted, "I know they are gone and I miss them but it brought me you so it's OK." The next week went quickly. The students were eager to get through the week fast and John planned a light week for them. Mr. Leeds was pleased that the students took to John's style so easily, asking them what they liked about it. Many of them simply said, "It's new and exciting" while others just said, "It's his enthusiasm." Mr. Leeds laughed and said, "You kids are something else." Thanksgiving was a somber affair. Without Catherine, the house seemed emptier. John was banned from the kitchen again as per tradition but allowed to set the table. Due to his classes, he couldn't spare the time to go the football game, instead staying home typing a paper while Jaimie and Michael watched cartoons and worked on homework. The annual trip to the sales was called off, Karen didn't feel like going through the crowds and Leslie was trying to get used to the twins' schedules. Michael and the boys got together for an impromptu football game. They invited their classmates, Eric Vincent and George Daniels, to play as they lived close by and they wanted more players. The two were friendly with the group and worked with the girls on different class projects but hadn't broken through to joining them full time. They didn't mind that they weren't entirely accepted but hoped one day to be. Jenna seemed to be annoyed with George for some reason. He was nice and funny but his jokes always seemed to annoy her. The girls teased her that she was too picky with her boys which George shrugged off saying, "At least someone thought enough of me to consider me worthy of being rejected." The girls laughed at the joke, which made Jenna blush and grunt in faux anger. John's final week of teaching came up fast and the kids were sad to see his time end. They were told that the next semester he was switching to another class but was staying in class as an observer until then. He would, however, do some spot-teaching if there was a need for Mr. Leeds to be absent but he would not do his normal style, instead, he'd copy Mr. Leeds' style so as to keep things flowing. Mr. Leeds assured the class that he might take a few tricks from John and add some spice to their classes. The last week also saw the first quarter grades given out. The kids scored better than expected thanks to their enthusiastic participation in John's classes. John earned praise from his colleagues but let the kids get all the credit. Hannah and Bryan earned "As" which they were pleased about. On the last day, a few students were in tears as John shut off the cameras for the last time in class. Mr. Leeds personally thanked him for being so devoted to the job and making it an interesting month. He also told him to beware of his next class, it might not work out as well. Chapter 7: Special Christmas Gifts Jaimie and the girls agreed that they needed dates before Christmas. They hadn't been out since the previous spring with school and Jaimie's brutal assault taking all their free time since. Will asked out Claire, he didn't even bother to ask out anyone else just going with his longtime crush. Jenna and Stacy were odd girls out until Jenna was asked out by Miles Arnold. Stacy tried to stay home, she wasn't ready to date anyone yet especially after last April's assault. The girls annoyed her into going, insisting she at least go with Rebecca and her friends to the kiddie movie. To the younger kids' annoyance, John again was their chaperone. The parents trusted the kids enough to let them go on their own but Dan and John warned the boys about getting too frisky. To ensure their behavior Bryan and Hannah were taking their dates to the same movie and sitting nearby. Jenna's date Miles not surprisingly kept his hands to himself and didn't try any kissing or hugs until she grabbed him and planted a big kiss on his lips at the end of the night, making the poor boy faint. Pete, Hannah's date, was on the verge of laughter but saw Hannah's twisted smile and stopped. John shook his head laughing saying, "Pete, I think she broke you." Pete flushed with embarrassment as Hannah kissed his cheek with pride. Bryan shook his head and said, "She really likes you, normally she would be mad and have hurt you for laughing." Pete looked at Hannah with a smile and said, "Make her mad? Why would I do something as stupid as that- I know she'd hurt me easily!" This earned him another kiss and a sly look towards Bryan from Hannah. The dates were a success, Richard and Michael asked if they could make it a monthly event. The girls were all too eager to agree. Miles was unsure what to do, opting to keep quiet. John wouldn't agree yet, only saying, "It depends on your grades and your parents. If I see any slippage the dates are off." December was a slow month for everyone. For Christmas, the kids agreed on a small amount to be spent on each other knowing that Jaimie and Michael would go overboard otherwise. John asked if there was anything specific the kids wanted, nobody could come up with anything though which pleased John. The kids had finally gone past childhood greed and made it into adulthood giving. John purchased some special items for his students. All of them were given personalized high capacity flash drives, each in the school colors and school year. He stated, "This is so you have a copy of your work. You spend a lot of time on it and put a lot of effort into it so you should have a copy of it for all times." The act got many other students jealous, John had topped what other teachers had done. Three days before Christmas the Finns got special visitors. Evelyn and Joseph Johnson had come to visit for Christmas and New Year. Joseph was eager to see the twins and Evelyn wanted to get away from the boredom of Newhall. When they were settled in Joseph explained that Missouri seemed so foreign now that the kids were entrenched here, they didn't want to miss out on anything anymore. John asked, "Did this have anything to do with what we talked about in October?" Joseph nodded saying, "It got me thinking. You were right. With their grandmother passing having us so far away seems wrong. I think it was finally time to head east too." Evelyn asked, "Did you mean what you said, John?" John nodded saying, "They have gone back and forth a few times already, as much as they love you guys they don't like reminders of the past. It's especially true now that they have such good friends and here. It's not fair to anyone. Jaimie will miss Jessica but eventually, both will get over it." Evelyn asked about their friendship, John could only say, "It's what could have been, but won't be. She is the Missouri equivalent of Jenna, her friends aren't as accepting as Jenna's friends were though and their parents aren't too thrilled that Jessica's parents are so involved in the rebuilding of the town government or are friendly with Valerie and I. She's a good kid who I hope can rise above that place." Joseph took the boys out for a guy's night while John made plans for the move with Evelyn. John asked how much help she would need, saying, "Hannah and Bryan want to help and Richard and Jenna are being forced to come by special request from Jessica and her friends. I was hoping you would also allow Rebecca and Stacy to come so their parents can have a break before the baby comes." Evelyn asked, "Are they OK with them going halfway across the country?" John laughed and said, "They would insist on paying for their tickets. They know I won't accept a penny but the sentiment is there." She agreed to the help with a smile. Joseph and the boys had a long talk while out at a local go-cart track. Joseph questioned Richard closely about his intentions with Jaimie. Richard was scared to death, giving him simply, "I just want to make her happy, love her, and to one day marry her." Joseph asked about the October incident, Richard cringed at the memory and simply said, "I wish it didn't happen. I didn't want my first glimpse of her in that way to be an accident that she wants to forget. Michael made me pay for it, and Jaimie is ashamed of it." Joseph patted him on the back, saying, "Son, you are a great person. Normal boys would be gloating about seeing a girl naked, you are ashamed and apologized to Jaimie, Michael, and their dad even though it wasn't your fault. That says more about you as a man than any words can. She is lucky that her first love has such a good heart." Richard started to feel at ease but was careful around Joseph. Michael asked what was going on, Joseph slyly smiled and said, "Nothing of your concern anymore." Michael tried to pry into it but Joseph repeated sternly, "This is nothing of your concern." Michael backed off but listened closely anyway. The boys had a good time with Joseph. He enjoyed spending time with Michael and hadn't had this much fun in years. The boys brought out the parent in Joseph; Evelyn looked at him and said, "The last time you smiled like that was when Valerie was Michael's age. That was before she found boys." Michael joked, "Guess girls can't have fun like us." Valerie retorted, "Your grandpa didn't want to fight for my attention; I guarantee if Courtney was there you wouldn't be acting the same way." Michael blushed as everyone else laughed, all knowing it was true. Christmas Eve the family threw a big party for all of their friends. The kids exchanged their gifts while the adults watched intently. John gave all of the girls the same charm bracelets while the boys got gold chains to which they would add the pendants they received last year. They received other small gifts from one another but nothing too big. The twins were the stars, getting lots of attention from the kids and parents. They didn't really care what was going on as long as someone was playing with them. Joseph had trouble passing Cat around; she refused to let him out of her sight, insisting on holding his fingers. JD was doing the same with Evelyn, but he was willing to let her pass him to Anne and Leslie whenever Evelyn needed a break. The party broke up around 9 PM with the kids getting tired. Evelyn and Joseph talked with Melanie, Dan, Anne, Richard Sr. and Olivia regarding the impending move in February. They all agreed to let the kids go provided they keep their grades up which Joseph proudly supported. Melanie had one concern which was would Stacy and Rebecca be welcome among the Missouri kids. She didn't think it was going to be fair to go all the way out there and sit around while the kids attend Jessica's party. John thought it over and would have Jaimie ask when she called Jessica. The next morning the kids were up early. This year they didn't have a display of affection. They got the twins ready while their parents slept, keeping JD from making too much of a fuss as he got dressed while trying to change Cat's diaper. The four were waiting on the couch when Valerie and John both woke. Both looked concerned when the twins weren't in their crib but smiled seeing the four kids sitting there waiting for them to come out. Valerie grabbed the camera and immortalized the moment while John did the same with Valerie joining them. After breakfast, they opened their gifts. Jaimie got a bunch of skirts and blouses, Michael got a few games and clothes. He didn't like the clothes. Joseph and Evelyn came by after 11 AM and had the kids open the presents from them. Jaimie loved her new dresses. Michael wasn't happy that he got more clothes but hugged his grandparents anyway. After the presents were cleared Joseph had them sit down and told them the big news, their grandparents were retiring and moving east to be with them. Michael and Jaimie jumped up and hugged them asking why. Joseph told them the truth, "We want to be close to you four kids. We miss you and we don't want to miss any more moments." They hugged them and asked when they were moving. Joseph said, "Over February vacation. You were coming anyway and with your help, we will be able to get the move done fast. All eight of you are coming." Jaimie took a second to think. Michael simply asked, "Eight? Who else is coming?" Jaimie blurted out, "us, Jenna and Richard, but who else?" John added, "All four of your cousins." The two looked at John in disbelief asking, "really?" John nodded and said, "We wanted to give your aunts and uncle a break, plus you know how good they are at moving people." The kids hugged and smiled. Jaimie called Jessica to ask her about her Christmas morning. They exchanged small talk before Jaimie stopped stalling and dropped the bombshell, "I have good news and bad news for you. The good news is we are coming by again in February, the bad news is that will be our very last trip west. My grandparents are retiring and moving over here to be closer to us." Jessica was distraught but kept her composure. She asked meekly, "Are you at least going to bring your boyfriend?" Jaimie laughed and said, "Dad remembered you talking with him and said he's coming too, along with Jenna. He wanted to ask if it was OK to bring my cousins Rebecca and Stacy, they want to meet you." Jessica invited all of them, saying, "We need to have a goodbye party for you before you leave for good. I'll ask mom to set it up. The only problem will be my cousin; he will have to come since mom is babysitting him that week." Jaimie agreed and told her mom to call John. Jaimie next called Jenna and Richard to let them know. Richard wasn't thrilled to get dragged out west to meet girls who were jealous of Jaimie but Jenna was happy. She knew the girls already and hoped they were ready for them. They were sad that it would be the last trip but happy that Mr. Johnson was going to be around for the kids. When Michael was out of earshot Richard told Jaimie what he told him, Jaimie could only blush adding, "It's true, though." That evening over dinner Stacy and Rebecca were told the news. They were questioning why they would have to go, Dan was adamant that they enjoy their trip as it would be a while before the family could take one like that again. Rebecca was happy that she could help out but hoped the girls weren't too upset that she was tagging along to someone else's parties. Stacy just wanted to get away, and if it meant some time with Bryan it was all the more fun. Jaimie picked up on her crush and said, "He's too old for you; maybe you will meet a nice boy out there and forget Bryan." Stacy blushed in embarrassment as her sister teased her. Melanie asked what Jaimie meant by "Forget about Bryan" not realizing that her daughter had a crush on him. She watched Stacy closely and saw her blushing when Bryan entered the room finally realizing what was going on. Bryan and Hannah were the last to be told. The two were happy to help out but were reluctant to go to Jessica's party. Bryan remembered the loving looks the girls gave him, laughing as he said, "It wouldn't be fair to see them again and break their hearts a couple of hours later." Hannah rolled her eyes and said, "How is it any different than what you do in school?" Stacy and Jaimie burst into laughter as Rebecca rolled her eyes in agreement. Michael didn't say a word letting Bryan struggle in his search for a way to reply back. While the family was preparing dinner the doorbell rang. John answered it and was shocked to see William Kelly, the local reporter and friend of the family at the door. He was carrying a present for Jaimie, saying, "I am sorry to interrupt but I thought today would be the best day to give Jaimie this." Jaimie grabbed the present and opened it, looked up at John and started to cry. John looked at the items in her and started shaking, hugging Jaimie as she cried. Jaimie pulled herself together and hugged William. John asked, "Where did you get these?" William smiled and proudly proclaimed, "Remember the national media circus last summer? I was owed a few favors for giving the correct information to several media outlets. They paid me back by digging into Jaimie's past. They found a couple of living relatives that went unnoticed by the state when she was orphaned; they gladly gave the pictures over when they heard she was alive. Sadly they were estranged from her parents and the news of her gender change meant they want nothing to do with her." Jaimie showed the pictures to the family. They were pictures of her parents holding her as a baby and as a young child. The newest picture was from when she was about 5 years old. John asked her what she wanted to do with them, Jaimie asked that one be placed on the mantle alongside John's parents and Bryan and Hannah's father and the others placed in a photo album and a picture frame. John invited William in but he declined, only saying, "I have to get back to my son and mother. I hope it brings some closure to her." He left to a big hug from Jaimie. John asked that everyone give Jaimie some space, Jaimie insisted that she was fine and demanded they get back to normal. The family settled down for their meal with John keeping an eye on Jaimie. He didn't see anything that looked like she was feeling grief or other emotional distress. Jaimie smiled at him and whispered, "I'm fine dad. I just needed to let out a good cry." Valerie leaned in and said, "She has come a long way, I think she might be stronger than we realize. Just give her space." John stopped watching closely and ate in silence. After dinner, the family helped Jaimie with her picture frame and photo album. Jaimie was silent as she put the pictures in, finally saying, "I miss you two but I am happy to have found people who love me as their own" hugging John, Valerie, and Michael as the others looked on. Chapter 8 January Troubles The Johnsons spent the next two days house hunting. They were surprised at how expensive some houses were in the area but were determined to find one that was close to the family as possible. They were used to driving longer distances but they wanted one in the city itself. John convinced them to try the Navy Hill neighborhood. It wasn't too expensive and it had parks close by. It was perfect for them. Jaimie and Michael asked John why he didn't move there, John was quick to point out that they would have missed out on the Lopez family as John would never have reconnected with Melanie. They also realized that it would have meant Stacy wouldn't have made friends with them and Rebecca would have been all alone, both of those thoughts causing them to cringe in horror. The views weren't worth losing the Lopez family. Evelyn and Joseph saw the kids off to school on the 2nd. They watched them enjoy telling Will, Claire, and Courtney about their trip and hoped to take part in more of these moments. The kids were all smiles as they saw their grandparents looking on, waiving at them as they went inside for the day. Melanie asked, "Does this bring back any memories of Valerie's childhood?" Joseph shook his head "no" telling her that they sent her to a private boarding school, this was their first real taste of public school. He had a deep regret in his voice, but perked up when Melanie said, "Well now you can make up for it with the kids, they love having you close and moving here is going to make them closer." Evelyn could barely contain her smile, Melanie was right. Moving was the right choice for them. Evelyn and Joseph had to return home on the 3rd. The kids were sad that they couldn't see them off but happy that it was only going to be a short time until they saw them every day. Jaimie was in contact with Jessica almost daily, planning her birthday party and the going away party. She said her cousin was eager to meet the new people. Jaimie asked who her cousin was; she didn't remember meeting him before. Jaimie knew most of the kids her age but none that were related to Jessica. Jessica was reluctant to tell her, Jaimie sensed her hesitation and asked, "It's someone who doesn't like me, isn't it." Jessica quietly muttered, "It's Scott." Jaimie asked the obvious, "Is he still the same person who beat me up?" Jessica cried and told her Scott's story. The real story. One that he had sworn her to secrecy. Scott was a good person, his father was a scumbag. He beats Scott for any little thing, making him hurt anyone who is different or doesn't fit his dad's idea of what is normal. Scott hates doing it. He liked Jaimie, he wanted to be her friend but his dad's hand and belt were stronger than his feelings for her. Jaimie started crying. She realized what he said was true saying, "He told me he was sorry the last time we were in Ms. Albert's class." Jessica asked if she was OK, Jaimie could only say, "Does your mom know about his abuse?" Jessica quietly said, "No, Scott hides it. She knows he is different around her than around his dad but he won't say anything to her. Mom is his mom's twin so it's like having her back alive to him." Jaimie got an idea and said, "Dad is a teacher now and required to say something if he thinks there is abuse. He might be Scott's savior." Jessica had to contain her smile and said, "He can see the marks and say something to mom then go to the school. Scott wouldn't have to know, he would get protected. They won't let his dad hurt him anymore. You are a genius." Jaimie shamefully said, "No, a genius would have seen he was in trouble long ago." The month went by slowly. The kids signed up for the local youth basketball league to break the winter boredom. Michael, Jenna, and Richard were on one team. Courtney, Rebecca, Jaimie, and Will were on another. Stacy and Claire opted to take video of the games instead of playing. Leslie Finn was asked to coach Jaimie's team. She was the only person who agreed, others who were asked refused on grounds of not wanting to coach Jaimie or not wanting the drama from other people. Leslie didn't care about either, she loved helping the kids and they loved learning from her. Will was a natural on the court. He was taller, faster, had better reflexes than the others on the team. He also loved to help the others improve, giving them essentially another coach. Jaimie knew she was going to be a constant target so Will had her close by, if they wanted to go after her they hurt their team more than Jaimie. She and Will were a strong combination; she had some skills but was a better passer than a shooter. Leslie used this ability to her advantage, setting up plays that gave the ball to Rebecca and Courtney while everyone was focused on Jaimie and Will. The team had three practices before their first game. The players were excited as were their parents. Will was proud as his father had come to the game to watch him. The first game of the entire year for the league was Leslie's team against Michael's team; Michael hugged his aunt and said, "We won't go easy on you." Leslie laughed and shot back, "Good then we won't be sorry when we beat you." Richard and Jaimie and Michael and Christina hugged before the game and got glares from a few in the crowd including Will's father. The game was brutal. Michael's teammates were all over Jaimie, knocking her down and running into her whenever possible. Leslie constantly complained about this, getting threatened with ejection several times. By halftime, Will had had enough. He walked over to Michael and bluntly said, "You have to stop this. Jaimie is getting hurt out there, she doesn't even have the ball and she is being run over and knocked down." Michael was getting angry and said, "Coach is telling them to do it. I tried to reason with them but they won't defy his orders." He motioned their friends who were sitting on the bench, saying, "The only time the abuse stops is when they are in so he keeps them out. He won't take me out because I'm his best player." Will told Leslie what was going on. She complained to the referee who bluntly said, "Just shut the hell up. I don't want to hear any more complaining about the little freak's treatment. If that thing didn't want abuse it wouldn't be here playing." Leslie had enough, said, "Is that how you treat players in this league? Letting them get hurt because you have a problem with them?" He ejected her. The team walked off along with her, as did Michael and their friends as well as three other teammates. The game was quickly canceled. Stacy and Claire showed the video to Alice Rodriguez. She was at the game with her son Raul and daughter Stephanie who were to play in later games. She winced at what he had said and called over the league's officials. With a rare fury, she bluntly said, "I am not sorry to say but this was the last game of your league in this school. Your league is in violation of your agreement with the schools. This city won't tolerate any kind of insulting language or discrimination against anyone especially against a child." The officials tried to reason with her but said, "It's on video, there is no defense. If you don't mind you have a half hour to clear out so I suggest you start calling coaches and parents and informing them why your games are canceled. And I do suggest you find a new home for your league, I'll be informing both Mr. Bollinger and the elementary school principals about your league's actions and as is the policy they will stand by my decision to terminate your contract." The parents were outraged at what happened. The league was a highly praised organization that was known for helping kids. Today it had now gone out of its way to try to harm one. There was nothing more to say, the parents pulled their kids away and left, leaving with some harsh words for the officials. Instead of being proud of his son for standing by his teammate Will's father was livid. He grabbed his arm and yanked him aside, screaming, "What the hell did you do? You ruined the league! You are their best player! Why would you do that!" Will tried to get away but was held firm. His father smacked his face hard several times, leaving a big hand print on it. He screamed, "Are you dumb or just plain stupid? You are better than them, you don't need them. Don't be an idiot." Will screamed, "I will not let my friend get hurt!" He again smacked Will hard across his face causing Will's nose to bleed. Will burst into tears again trying to get away. His father smacked him several more times to get him to stop crying. He balled his fist for a harder hit but had his arm wrenched behind his back. He turned and swung his other arm but was hit with a punch thrown right at his nose, breaking it and sending him to the floor. When he looked up Dan Lopez was standing over him, hands ready for more. Will crawled behind Dan, who said, "Buddy, you messed with the wrong kid." Dan looked down at Will and offered him a hand up, saying, "It's all on video, he can't hurt you anymore." Will was in tears watching as his father placed in handcuffs and dragged off. Leslie, Melanie, and John calmed Will down and iced his wounds. His friends stood by him not letting anyone else help. They drove Will to the hospital to get his nose checked out then called his mother to tell her what happened. His mother was out of state with his grandmother, Will had nowhere to go and needed a place to stay until she returned. Richard's mother and father were with her as he was staying with John and Valerie for the week. Unsure what to do they didn't want to go with the obvious option and let child services take him. Leslie volunteered to take him in, she had space and he would be with someone he trusted. His mother agreed to that, granting her temporary custody until she returned. Will was fine with this as well. The kids helped move his stuff in with Leslie. They left the two alone to get acquainted and let Will get some rest. Will and Leslie talked and watched TV finding they liked a lot of the same things. Leslie joked, "This is almost a rerun of John and Jaimie." Will laughed saying, "Yeah but I have no intention of becoming a girl." Leslie burst into laughter as well; the boy was doing better already. The next morning they went over to John's house so Valerie could get him the needed legal help to keep his father away. His dad was only facing assault charges because he hadn't laid a finger on Will before but he made it clear to the police that he was going to hurt him as soon as he was released. Will just wanted him gone, he never wanted to see him again. He told them about what his father would do in the past whenever his mother went away, tearfully admitting that this wasn't the first time he endured a beating. A restraining order was issued to protect Will and his mother. His dad would never be able to hurt him again. Will watched as Richard and Jaimie sat silently on the couch watching their favorite show on TV. Michael tried to make a snide comment, Will told him bluntly, "Don't be jealous that they share something in common. I'd join them but I want to give them some personal time. I suggest you do the same." Leslie whispered to Valerie, "Why did it take getting hurt by his father to open up to his friends?" Valerie whispered back, "In a crisis you learn who you real friends and family are. He knows we all care about him as more than 'Richard's cousin' now." Chapter 9: Deeper Friendships Will was getting along great with Leslie. The two loved to watch basketball and football while shooting hoops at the nearby park. Leslie taught him basic techniques that her coaches had taught her years before that vastly improved Will's game. He dominated his friends to the point that it wasn't even a game for them anymore. Richard bluntly said, "No fair, you have a personal coach!" Michael was jealous of all her attention, saying, "I thought you were going to teach me that stuff." Will didn't want to cause any trouble and called it a day, saying, "You better let them have a go; it's not fair to them." Leslie scolded Michael, who tried to rationalize his anger. Leslie was adamant, telling him, "I tried to teach you, you wouldn't listen. You learned some things from me but you just try to score; he's interested in learning defense and passing. He's an all-around player; you are a shooter which is why he is better than you so far." Richard asked, "Will you teach us?" Leslie agreed, but only if Michael calmed down and apologized. Michael grumbled an apology and Leslie taught the two how to play better. They were quick learners, after an hour they were giving Will a decent challenge. He still dominated them due to his height and reflexes but they were playing better defense and rebounding better. Leslie was thrilled at his turnaround; Michael tried to hide his humility and eagerness but did a poor job of it. The girls came by to watch their boyfriends in action. Claire fawned over Will's ability to make the two dominant friends look terrible by comparison. Jaimie and Courtney saw her reactions and couldn't help but get some barbs in against the boys. Neither boy said anything as they feared they might say something that would upset them but the message was clear, the girls were happy to see them being made to look like fools by Will. Leslie called it a night, taking the six home for dinner. Courtney asked her where she learned all her moves, eliciting a few stories that Jaimie hadn't heard yet. She told them about the high school horror days, of John having to watch her play while she was babysitting him even taking him on road games. There are middle and high school boys who would have loved it but for a 9-year-old it was torture. Michael joked, "It's better than just sitting at home doing nothing." Leslie countered with, "Not when you are a glorified water boy and team mascot" to which the girls giggled. Leslie added, "John sucked it up and tried to keep busy, helping with the scoreboard and stat book. He also helped some of the players with their homework, which was pretty embarrassing for us since he was five or six grades below us." The kids asked her, "Why didn't you play in college or beyond?" Leslie shook her head and said, "Family comes first." The kids knew that saying well, John had used it dozens of times before but it was odd hearing it from another family member. Jaimie tried to be diplomatic and said, "Uncle Roland must be the only member who didn't get that motto." Leslie nodded sadly. Back at home Richard's stay was going along roughly. He was timid anytime Jaimie was around especially with Michael keeping a close eye on him. Almost three months later Richard and Jaimie still struggled to get over the October incident. Jaimie was trying her hardest to get close to Richard; there were times when he would allow her to get close but most times he pushed her away saying, "I promised Michael I wouldn't." Fed up with him Jaimie walked over to her room and shut the door in a huff. She had a determined look in her eyes that Richard failed to notice. A few minutes later Jaimie called Richard over. He knocked on the door and was told to come in. What he saw nearly caused him to faint. Jaimie was topless and in panties, doing a seductive dance for Richard. Richard apologized to her quickly turning around and left the room, shutting the door tight behind him. Jaimie quickly got dressed and chased after him asking him if he was OK. Richard didn't answer, she found him in the spare room in tears packing his things. Jaimie asked what he was doing, Richard on the verge of breaking down completely said, "I can't stay here with you, I like you too much. You did something for me that was too much to handle. I liked what I saw and I can't stop picturing it. If I stay here I might do something that I will regret and cause you trouble. I am sorry Jaimie but I can't stay here anymore." He walked out, saying he was going to Leslie's apartment to stay with her until his parents came back. Jaimie burst into tears. John came in and asked what was going on only to be told, "I screwed up again" as she continued to cry. Michael walked in and demanded to know what Richard had done. Jaimie looked screamed, "He is so afraid of what you will do him that he left." John told Michael to go to his room and let them talk, he would be in shortly. Michael tried to protest but was told, "Go." John sat on Jaimie's bed next to her. He asked her gently what actually happened. She told him about trying to get close to Richard and getting frustrated that he didn't want to respond. She told him that she stripped down and told him to come into the room and how he reacted. She started tearing up again and said, "He said he liked me too much to do anything he would regret and didn't want to cause trouble. He packed his things and went to Aunt Leslie's house." John hugged her and said, "You pushed him too far, he wasn't ready yet. He fears Michael's reaction more than mine or mom's. He loves you; anyone with half a brain can see that. It's that love that stops him from doing anything that he will regret." John sat silently holding Jaimie for several minutes then said, "I'll talk with Michael. He needs to lighten up. He will lose his best friend and hurt his sister if he doesn't stop." Michael was expecting the worst. He was prepared for a war of words. John simply sat down and said, "You blew it. I told you to back off and you blew it. You know him better than anyone, you know what he can and can't do and you still insisted on being a jerk about his relationship. Now you might have cost yourself your best friend and spoiled your sister's love. Congratulations, I hope you are happy." Michael shot back, "I wasn't even here; I was in the basement when this happened!" John looked at him squarely and said, "You didn't have to be in the room, fear of you was enough. He doesn't want to lose either of you so he left to avoid that." John let his words sink in. Michael tried hard to find the right words before responding, failing miserably to put the blame on Jaimie or Richard. Michael sat silently hoping John would give him his punishment but he got up and left him to his own thoughts as he was fighting his emotions. John called Leslie to check in on Richard. He arrived safely and told her what happened. Leslie was giving him space while Will and she tried to figure out what to do. John said he expected Michael will take a while to mature enough to accept the truth but didn't expect that to happen for a few days. Leslie agreed to watch Richard until his parents returned but hoped Jaimie and he would make up soon. Jaimie heard the conversations and ran off. She went directly to Leslie's house and right at Richard. She didn't say anything, only hugged him. When she calmed down she only uttered, "The hell with him, I don't want to lose you because he can't let me be me." Leslie cleared her throat and asked, "Are you staying for dinner or was this just a personal visit?" Jaimie blushed and said, "I'll stay for dinner Aunt Leslie." Leslie let John know where she was and that they had made up, but said, "Don't let Michael know yet, the last thing I need is him causing more trouble." The next morning the four girls confronted Michael. They told him bluntly, "Stop being a baby, let Jaimie grow up. Richard and she are perfect for one another and you know damn well he loves her." Michael tried to argue against it but Courtney argued, "You forgot what I told you before? Why are you allowed to date me and kiss me and hug me but Richard can't? Is it because Jaimie is mature enough to not need your protection? Is it because you are jealous? Leave them alone, Michael." Michael went back home to seethe. His friends had gone against him, his girlfriend had gone against him, and his parents had gone against him. He loved Jaimie and didn't want her hurt, but how can he protect her if she won't let him protect her? He asked his dad that question; he was told bluntly, "Who told you that you still had to protect Jaimie? Ever since you met your friends you haven't had to. She needs you there to be beside her not in front of her, you are her brother and her closest friend, not her bodyguard. She needs to make her own mistakes, how can she learn not to do something if she isn't allowed to do it?" Michael asked, "I'm her brother, isn't it my job?" John shook his head and said, "I'm a brother and so is Roland. We didn't protect each other; we let ourselves make our own mistakes. It worked out for me, not so much for Roland. Your aunts Karen and Leslie learned the same way; we each let ourselves make our own mistakes but were there for each other when we needed each other." Michael started to see what he meant. Michael called Richard and defeatedly said, "We need to talk." Richard walked over and Michael hugged him, saying, "I'm sorry. I'm so sorry." He told him what his dad had said. He told him that, "She is ready to go without me." Richard asked if he was finally giving his blessing, Michael said, "She never needed it." Richard called Jaimie and told her what happened. Michael called Courtney and apologized and begged for forgiveness. The two couples set a date for that weekend with the hopes that this was the last of the brother/sister protection problems. Richard told him he wasn't coming back to stay, he thought it best to not stay at his girlfriend's house since it wasn't proper. Richard told Leslie the news and what John said about Roland and him. Leslie rolled her eyes at the mention of Roland and said, "If he was mentioning him this must have really been a bad situation. He thinks the world of you and to tell Michael that means Michael must have needed a serious dose of reality. I agree with him about not staying over your girlfriend's house, you two may be 13 and she can't get pregnant but you still need boundaries." Richard cringed at the thought and said, "I can barely stand to see her topless, that's a bit extreme of a thought!" Will and Leslie laughed at that saying, "You are still too young to spend the night at your girlfriend's house. Maybe when you are 18 or in college you can." Richard groaned as Will laughed at the teasing. Chapter 10: Tested Limits Will and Richard had a great time at Leslie's home during the 10 days they stayed together. Richard was different than his cousin. He wasn't as big of a sports fan but he loved sports and could talk it up with them with ease. Richard enjoyed that Leslie didn't mind his boring sci- fi shows especially when he was watching with Jaimie. Will poked fun at the two but secretly enjoyed watching them as well. Claire was a frequent visitor. She and Will did their homework together and talked in the living room under Leslie's keen eye. The two spent hours just talking and playing basketball together in the park until her mother picked her up. Jenna was getting jealous of Claire's growing relationship with Will. Her newest boyfriend, Miles, was laid back and took things slow. She was getting annoyed at that but didn't want to say anything to him. Claire tried to reason with her, saying, "Will needs someone to support him; Miles is content with taking things in stride. You know that he isn't exactly the richest kid so he has a lot to be fearful about. They are two different people; you know how sweet Miles is he just needs ways to show it." Jenna wasn't buying this, saying, "He is taking forever. He knows I like him but he won't budge and ask me out again." Courtney was caught in the middle. She tried to reason with both saying, "Neither has asked you out beyond the one date." Jenna hinted she wanted another one but Miles hadn't responded. Courtney tried to rationalize, "Maybe he is giving Will some time to recuperate first. You know he is trying to befriend the boys but his dad is holding him back, why wouldn't he wait to date you if it meant he would go with his potential buddy?" Jenna dismissed the thought, but Claire realized that was the real reason. Courtney was getting annoyed and asked, "Why don't you just ask him why he hasn't asked you out?" Jenna didn't respond, leaving in a huff. She wouldn't talk with either girl for the rest of the weekend. Jaimie noticed the rift and tried to reason with her but even she couldn't get her out of it. Will asked what was going on, noticing the girls fighting. Jaimie told him bluntly, "Jenna wants another date, Miles hasn't responded. She is getting jealous of you and Claire." Will blanched, took a few seconds to compose himself, and finally said, "Did she ask him yet? He isn't good at picking up signals. And don't even get me started on his dad's influence on his psyche." Jaimie rolled her eyes and said, "We told her that, she didn't want to listen." Will groaned and walked over to Jenna and asked her, "Did you ask Miles when you can have your second date yet?" Jenna grew angry and asked, "Did Claire send you over?" Will nearly said some harsh words but blurted out, "I asked Jaimie what was going on. Despite staying out of this she could see that your real problem was your own ignorance." Jenna shot back, "How am I ignorant? I want him to move forward but he's stuck paddling around." Will drew a heavy breath to calm himself. After a few seconds, he blurted, "For your information Miles has trouble picking up signals from others. If you aren't straightforward he won't know what you really want. Why the heck do you think he stays clear of us, he wants to be friends with Richard, Michael, and I but can't understand if we want him around or not. He stays clear because he doesn't want to do the wrong thing. You know he has been this was for a couple of years, he's friendly but scared of his own shadow around us." Jenna tried to apologize, but Will brushed her off telling her, "Don't apologize to me, apologize to Claire. She knows the real Miles; the two have known each other longer than any of us have. She could tell he was struggling with what to do; he is too nice to make a move but too scared not to. He needs a little help guiding him but only you can do that." Jenna was speechless, she knew her friend well but not well enough to remember that big fact. She rushed over to Claire and apologized for overreacting telling her that she was right about Miles. Courtney looked at Will who was waiting for them to make up, finally accepted her apology. Miles walked over and asked what was going on and was quickly asked, "When can we have another date?" Miles simply replied, "Whenever you feel like it." Courtney rolled her eyes at the whole turn of events, glad that she didn't have that kind of drama this time. Watching all of this unfold Stacy couldn't help but feel twinges of jealousy. She had tried to get herself together but the boys in school just brought up too many bad memories. She talked with her mother and Jaimie about this; both assured her she just needed time. She would grow out if it once exposed to boys she didn't know or didn't have a history with. Will, Richard, and Leslie had a great time together but it came to an end all too quickly. Richard's parents came to collect them on Sunday night with big hugs and teary eyes. Leslie gave them some time alone with Olivia thanking her for the privacy. Richard told his mother what happened with Jaimie, she surprised him saying, "I know, John told me right away. Next year if your grandmother is still with us I think this might be the better option for you, you two are harmless to each other but the reputations you get could be a bad thing to have." Will asked what was going to happen to him. Olivia shook her head and asked, "Your mom may have to stay for a while. Your grandma isn't doing so well and needs someone there to help her. She is glad to hear that you two got along so well. You can either come with us or stay with Leslie. It is up to you." Will didn't hesitate, saying, "I want to stay here." Richard looked disappointed but didn't respond. Will saw his reaction and said, "You know I love you but it's too crowded at your house. Well, not really but I don't want Aunt Olivia and Uncle Richard on me all of the time." Olivia asked Leslie to come in and talked with her about Will. She agreed to care for him until his mother was able to return. Olivia assured her that she and her husband wouldn't interfere; she was leaving everything to Leslie and Will to sort out. She didn't anticipate any problems but she had her full support if need be. Olivia and Leslie got to know one another while Richard Sr. and the boys got Richard packed. Olivia asked how she could live in a big house by herself, Leslie could only reply, "I was going to move to a smaller apartment but this came up. I didn't think moving would be a good idea with Will here." Olivia disagreed saying, "He needs support, not a huge house; I think you should move as planned." Will walked in and asked what they were talking about, Olivia blurted out, "Leslie was going to move to a smaller apartment soon and needed help." Richard asked, "Is it the one Ms. Vega moved out of? Jaimie mentioned her dad was saving it for you." Leslie nodded. Will said, "It's a nice place, this place is too large." Leslie looked at Olivia saying, "What have you gotten me into?" She handed Leslie her phone to which Leslie called John and told him about the situation and the move and of course he asked Jaimie and Michael to help. Leslie groaned at the help, she knew they would force themselves on her but this was going to be a huge pain for her. She would rather have just her and Will do it but it was extremely hard to deny her niece when she had her mind set on something. Michael would have taken the hint but Jaimie was Jaimie and wouldn't let you do something that important without all the help you could get. The move was that weekend and the crew was at Leslie's house early. Rebecca was doing her best job as a coordinator, ensuring that all the important things went last and the fragile ones were wrapped tight. Stacy and the others were annoyed at her being able to get around heavy work but Leslie asked, "Would you like to figure out how everything goes everywhere?" They didn't bother to answer. Stacy met a few neighboring boys while working. They went to a private school so they weren't the usual boys she was used to. They offered to help her but were shot down by a defensive Michael. John noticed what was going on and let her take time off, but told Michael to stay close by and only interfere if she was in actual trouble. Michael groaned in agreement and went back to work. The boys were nice enough to her but Stacy was still guarded, smiling and laughing but not falling for their charms. She listened to them posture and preen for her attention finally settling on one boy, Lance. He was smart and funny and had a strong charm, after talking with him for a bit she agreed to a date with him. She added the stipulation that Jaimie and Courtney also come. He agreed. During the week there was a noticeable change in Stacy. Her date seemed to have given her new energy. John and the girls didn't let on that they noticed telling her that she seemed happy. Friday night she was giddy with Jaimie and Courtney having to calm her down. Michael and Richard warned her that if there was any trouble they were going to act. When Lance was dropped off they said the same thing to him, with him eyeing them suspiciously as if he was sizing them up. John gave the usual speech and left them alone but sat watching from a distance. The girls knew he was watching closer than normal, keeping an ever watchful eye on Lance. The kids got through most of the movie with no problem. With about 20 minutes left to go in it, Lance tried to make a few moves on Stacy. She removed his arm from her shoulder several times without saying a word and leaned away from him when he tried to snuggle close. He didn't say anything but his face had an annoyed disappointment all over it. After the movie, Stacy saw his pouting and said, "Sorry but I am careful on dates. I just met you and don't trust you yet." Lance tried to plead with her but Jaimie tersely said, "The last boy who dated her went too far and ended up arrested. Don't push her." Courtney said, "If you actually like her let her go at her pace and leave her to do what she is comfortable with." Michael and Richard walked away with the girls. Lance mumbled something about her being a tease which Michael heard. He whispered to Richard who told Jaimie. The two girls walked up to Lance and blurted out, "Oh she is a tease? Because she wouldn't let you get your way? Because she doesn't kiss or let you cop a feel on the first date?" Stacy heard the exchange and ran up to him, slapping his face and saying, "I thought private school boys would be different, I was wrong. If you think refusing you is being a tease then you are going to end up alone for the rest of your life." John sat back and watched. The girls humiliated Lance, every boy and girl there were laughing at him. Stacy sat down next to him and asked, "Am I doomed to not have a boyfriend?" John leaned in, hugged her, and said, "You will find a nice boy. Not every boy can be like your friends. Just give it time." Stacy started to cry and hugged him back saying, "Thanks for being here for me." John didn't say a word only kissing her head letting her cry herself out. Chapter 11: New Challenges It was a new year with a new semester starting and John was set to begin his second set of solo teaching hours. In the fall he taught history, this time he would be teaching government and geography. John was strong on government as it was just an extension of history to him. He feared teaching geography, though, he was a whiz at it as a student but as a teacher, he would need more time and effort to get facts and lectures right. His fears were justified; the students didn't react the way he wanted them to. He tried teaching the same way he taught history, he tried concepts and focusing on topics but that was turning into a bore or was ignored by the students. He tried everything he could think of to get them interested in the class. Nothing seemed to work, even suggestions from his mentor Ms. Paula. Two weeks in John had to endure a parent-teacher conference. The parents weren't thrilled with the results so far, many students saw their grades slip and John was the sole focus of their blame. John took their criticism hard, letting them vent their frustrations out on him as he cringed. Ms. Paula noticed the trend and reviewed the videos of the classes. John was doing his best to try to keep them going but none of the students bothered to listen. He reviewed everything, offered worksheets and study guides but none of the seemed interested. Then it dawned on them. It wasn't John who was at fault; it was the students who weren't trying. John was trying hard but they didn't seem to care. Even, "A" students were distracted. They didn't want to listen to the student teacher. Ms. Paula pointed out what was happening and suggested John keep trying. If he couldn't connect it wasn't his fault, the students were at fault. Student teachers were seen as easy graders and breaks for the kids and if he failed them it wouldn't impact them. Or so they thought. Rebecca, Jessie, Amy, and Kelly had a dilemma. They needed someone to babysit them while their parents went to the middle school parent- teacher conferences. John asked if they were willing to endure something for him he would watch them and reward them. The girls reluctantly agreed, knowing it was either that or they wait in the library which was even worse since they couldn't talk. The next day the girls were dropped off at the high school and John escorted them to a classroom. He had them do their homework while he finished grading assignments. When they were all done John revealed his plan, he would test out his new teaching style on them. Rebecca groaned and said, "I've seen you teach already." John laughed and said, "I know, that's why I want you to critique me. The girls haven't seen me teach, though. If I can get them to understand maybe I can get my students to as well." The girls eagerly listened to John's lecture. He added some pictures and maps but it was mostly the same. Rebecca told him it was, "Boring, unoriginal, and lazy." John asked the girls about it to which Kelly said, "You talk a lot but you don't show enough pictures to support it." Amy agreed, saying, "It would be nice to have something that shows what you mean, an animation or drawing it yourself." Jessie shook her head and said, "I know you are trying but I think you are trying too hard to be new. Sometimes the old ways are best; just present it in a different way." John thought about what they said. He asked, "So if I find some maps, some drawings showing motion and maybe some animations you think it will improve?" All four girls said a rousing, "Yes!" John smiles at their honesty and agreed to make changes. Jake Bollinger was walking by and heard the lecture and critique. He popped in and asked, "Aren't they a little young for high school level work?" John giggled and said, "They are smarter than you think. Not many people would be willing to tell a teacher how to teach," and showed Jake the notes they had made for him. Jake nodded, looking at what John had prepared before saying, "They are right, it suits history, not geography. I take it the students are thinking the same thing." John told him about the problems but got a simple reply of, "It's a factor but being a student teacher is the real reason. If they won't listen now then there isn't anything you can do. Just make the needed changes and try your best." The girls walked out with John, getting John a few funny looks. One of his colleagues asked, "Moonlighting at the middle school?" John jokingly replied, "Nope, hired a new writing staff. They work for ice cream instead of dollars." Everyone in the immediate area laughed as the girls smiled proudly. John gave them their reward, a trip to their favorite ice cream parlor. The kids told John about school and their upcoming events. Rebecca asked him if he would take her to the dance since her parents were busy and too tired with the baby. John had to say yes, Rebecca rarely asked him for things and the girls were encouraging him to say yes. The girls talked about what the dance was about and who was going. John asked about boys and the girls all blushed. Jessie asked about John's first dance, John shot a glare at Rebecca telling her to keep quiet. John told them about one in high school that was so boring it wasn't worth mentioning. Rebecca held her tongue for several minutes but couldn't hold back any longer. She looked at John and said, "I can't lie to them." John nodded and said, "You lasted longer than I thought." Amy and Kelly both asked what was going on, Rebecca blurted out, "His first dance was in 6th grade. It's how mom and he met. He danced for a couple of minutes, tripped, and knocked himself out. Mom kept him company until his parents came, he doesn't remember that part, though." The girls looked at John who nodded saying, "It's true. Melanie and I didn't truly meet until a few months later." The girls went back to talking about the dance. John listened as they discussed everything from makeup to dresses to who to dance with. John smiled to himself, thinking, "A year ago she was an outcast, now she's the leader of her own group of friends." Dropping off the girls at their homes John had to endure the embarrassment of them telling their parents that they changed his teaching style. They didn't press for details just saying, "Hope it works." Melanie met them at the house asking, "Hope she didn't rip you apart too much." John shook his head and said, "She did what I wanted her to do, and the girls followed her lead perfectly. Whatever effect she has on them it's doing wonders for all of them." Melanie kissed Rebecca and asked, "Did you ask him?" Rebecca nodded. Melanie smiled and said, "She wanted to ask you but wanted to do you your favor first." John nodded and said, "Smart girl." The next day John instituted his changes. He added maps and drawing and found some animations that fit the lecture. The students seemed more interested in what he was saying but there were many who just didn't bother. At the end of the week he gave a quiz on what they learned so far and over the weekend he saw there were a few that weren't even bothering. It was clear that some tried, but most just went through the motions to pass. John shrugged it off and continued his new style regardless. If they didn't want to learn it's their own choice. When several students failed John's test their parents came seeking vengeance. John explained what was going on and showed the video to them. They didn't want to believe it but there on video was their children ignoring the lesson, talking, texting, or surfing the internet. They apologized for the trouble. Vindicated John set up his lecture at his college. He would be lecturing to several of his fellow student teachers as well as administrators from other schools. John nailed his presentation, going over the history and the basics and showing highlights from his favorite classes. The questions asked of him were simple questions about administration and curriculum. There was a lot of genuine interest in the program and many asked about updates about it. John sadly gave them the news that it ended last June with the loss of support after the departure of Dorothy Vega. John was able to bring them good news in that the program survived in other places but the original was dead. John received several offers to start up programs in other cities and towns. He declined them all, saying that he wanted to focus on his family, finishing his degree, and earning his teaching license. There were many offers of teaching jobs if Winnisimmet didn't work out with John accepting cards from the administrators. John kept them in mind, his heart was in Winnisimmet but teaching was the ultimate goal regardless of where he wound up. On his way home from Salem John got a phone call from Miguel Toro. He asked if he could come down to Miami for a meeting. The team loved his idea and had been working with the city to get a program together but needed John to help with more input. John asked that he get back to him, he wanted to run the trip by his wife. He explained that with the twins it would be tough to leave her. Miguel asked if they had a vacation coming up, John told him he was booked solid in February but gave him the details of April vacation. The team was home that week and would gladly set up a meeting allowing him and his family to enjoy their time down in the area. He surprised John by asking to meet Jaimie since she was so influential her being there and giving her thoughts would help greatly. Plus she deserved to get out more, which John couldn't deny. He agreed to the trip and would speak with Valerie about it. At home, John told Valerie who quickly agreed. She would love a trip to a tropical place, and the kids would love to get out of the area for a bit. Jaimie didn't like the idea of being forced to go to the meeting but loved that someone cared enough about her to want to meet her. Michael wanted to enjoy the beach. Jaimie teased him saying, "Courtney won't like you looking at hot girls." Michael shot back, "Neither will Richard like you staring at hot baseball players." The two grinned at each other as their parents rolled their eyes in frustration. It was going to be a long 10 weeks. Chapter 12: Dances, Dates, and Changes Rebecca, Jessie, Amy, and Kelly were relentless when it came to planning the dance. They planned every detail from their makeup to their dresses to their shoes. The girls topped their siblings in terms of planning, going so far as to try to get John to dress a certain way. He told them exactly what he was wearing and would not let them pick out another outfit despite their pleas. The girls asked the older girls what they did before the dance but didn't like the response of, "Went on a date." Rebecca and the girls had crushes but none of them were ready for a real date. John reminded them that the girls only went out to dinner and a movie so none had gone elsewhere yet. Jessie was the first to ask out a boy. She chose her science partner, which led Amy and Kelly to do the same. Rebecca was hesitant, she actually liked her partner. He saw what the other girls were doing and asked her out, saying, "I like you too." She blushed and swooned with the other girls showing signs of jealousy. The boy, Thomas, asked for the details and asked who was chaperoning. Thomas Gault stared at John with fear in his eyes. He knew who his son was and knew how protective he is. He meekly said, "I won't do anything, I promise!" John ignored his pleas, saying, "Doesn't matter, all four of you get the same speech the older boys do." Rebecca tried to reason with John but she knew he was serious. Thomas and the boys were told, "Keep your hands to yourself; if she is uncomfortable you stop, if she says stop you stop. Break these rules and your hands get broken." The boys shivered in fear while Jessie, Amy, and Kelly looked on in horror. John said, "The one boy who broke the rule wound up with a broken nose and a trip to jail. I mean it." Rebecca rolled her eyes and explained what happened. The boys didn't loosen up just looked up in horror. John finally said, "You only have to fear the punishments if you break the rules, I don't think you boys will do that, will you?" All four boys meekly said, "No" and finalized their plans. John talked with the boys' parents and all agreed to the dates. Rebecca and John had a long talk about her crush with John saying, "You need to prepare for heartbreak. First crushes are the worst crushes, not all of them are like Richard and Jaimie or Michael and Courtney." She said, "I just can't believe a boy would like me enough to go out with me. I'm the class athlete, not the class pageant queen." John shook his head and said, "You are a beautiful girl that makes him laugh and keeps him interested. Most guys enjoy that more than being with the best looking girl. Plus if he can put up with a threat from someone who isn't your father he is a good person to be around." That cheered her up. As expected the date went smoothly. The girls and boys kept their distance from one another during the movie but were close during the meal. They had fun, enjoying being around each other without it being school related. They were still young so they didn't have the hormone- fueled lust that their older siblings had to put up with but it was fun for them none the less. Rebecca and Thomas had a great time talking more with each other than anyone else. They enjoyed each other's company, laughing at the other's jokes and listening to what the other was saying. John noticed the spark between them and smiled. They had chemistry and there was a potential future. During school the next day the girls talked with their other friends about the date. They were jealous that they had gone out with boys. The fun lasted until lunch when the self-appointed, "Queen of the 6th Grade", Rachel Murphy tried to start trouble. It was well known that she had a crush on Thomas. Hearing Rebecca having a good time with him sent her into a panic. She tried to spread rumors that Rebecca did some sexual things with Thomas then tried to say she kissed one of the other boys. The rumors fell flat once it was heard exactly who chaperoned them during the date. What happened with Stacy was still fresh in the minds of the kids. Mr. Finn being the chaperone meant there was no hanky-panky and the boys were gentlemen. Rachel didn't know about John's rules nor was she aware that he put fear into the boys, nor was she aware of what happened to the two boys who broke the rules. Rachel just spread the rumors without care. Rachel was furious that she couldn't get anyone to believe her. She confronted Rebecca and the girls saying, "rumors are spreading that you made out with Patrick after the movie." Jessie and the others laughed, shooting back, "Of course you would believe that, you started it." Rachel got angrier and shouted, "Then how do you explain Rebecca giving head to Thomas." Thomas shot her a furious, "When someone explains what that means to you then maybe we can reply to it, but seeing as you started it I am sure you know what it means already." Rachel immediately grew red in frustration. Every kid in the cafeteria was laughing at her, Rebecca and her friends had gotten the best of her again. Rachel tried to say something else but was stopped by Dorothy Vega. She kindly informed Rachel, "I warned you at the start of the year I won't accept bullying. Pack your things, you are suspended for two weeks." Rachel tried to plead but was shot down fast, "You tried to spread two rumors with the intent of harming a student's reputation for no reason other than jealousy. The second one being sexual blatantly violates the school rules earning you an automatic suspension. It is best to just accept the punishment before you humiliate yourself more." The kids in her class all sang, "Nanana na na na hey hey, goodbye!" as Rachel left in frustration. Rebecca silently mouthed, "Thank you," to Dorothy who nodded in reply. Rachel's minions Iris Donaldson and Francesca White-Clark did their best to stay hidden, not wanting to get on the bad side of Rebecca. Rebecca asked that they sit down and discuss a few things, trying to turn them into something other than enemies. The two sat down reluctantly, eyeing the others in fear of what they may do. The girls talked with them, getting them to open up and try to get away from Rachel's influence. The girls were reluctant, saying, "Her mom and dad are close friends of our parents; if we aren't friends with Rachel we need a good reason why." Rebecca stated, "Trying to avoid getting suspended for her actions are a good reason, making real friends is another. She is a bad person. You don't have to put up with her anymore. You are 12. You can start making your own friends." The girls asked to think it over. Rachel was a powerful influence and their parents might not like that they may abandon her. They asked to wait until after the dance, that way it's a clean start. The dance was held two days later. John wore his best suit to school. The students teased him about "a hot date" that night. John simply nodded saying, "Yep, all four of them." The quartet came to the school and picked up John, each wearing a nice dress and light makeup. A group of students whistled and howled at the girls as John escorted them to the parking lot for the drive to school. Before they left Jake Bollinger took a picture of his niece and the group, giddily joking to John, "Have them back home early, it's a school night." The teachers and staff all joined in the laughter as the girls smiled. The dance was your typical middle school dance with the kids taking a while to get the nerve to ask someone else to dance. John and the other chaperones were joking that, "Some things never change." John nodded when Principal Alice Rodriguez joked, "We don't have someone to break the ice like they had in the old school." John shuddered and said, "OK who told you?" She laughed as John turned red in embarrassment. She politely stated, "You would be surprised what they have in the archives downstairs. The school never got rid of the old incident reports or student files." John muttered, "Sorry, I thought one of the kids told you" which led to a fury of questions from the parents about the meaning. John let Alice respond as he slinked away quietly. The girls got bored of talking to one another. Rebecca took the initiative and asked Thomas to dance. The other girls followed suit and soon the dance truly started. Rebecca had several offers from other boys but declined in favor of dancing with Thomas. The two hit it off again, finding more to talk about while resting between songs. Before long the dance was ending and the final slow dance started. John had trouble prying the two apart when the dance ended. Rebecca gave him a kiss on the cheek for the dance and he returned the kiss. All eyes were on them as soon as that happened; nobody said anything but there was a lot of "Oohs" and "Awes" from the kids. The ride home was in silence as Rebecca and the girls digested the fun afternoon. They proudly told their parents what happened as soon as they got home with John being thanked for making the day fun. Rebecca told Melanie what happened to which John got a scold. He just shrugged and said, "I didn't do anything; she was the one who did it." Melanie said, "But she's so young" John pointed out, "Didn't you get your first kiss on the cheek from a boy at 10?" Melanie blushed and apologized before Rebecca caught wind. It was too late and John could hear Rebecca pleading to hear the story. In school the next day the girls had a sit down with Iris and Francesca. They told their parents what had happened in school and more importantly why it happened. Their parents weren't happy when Rachel's parents called to talk about what happened to her then tried to blame everyone else except Rachel for their daughter's suspension. What was most shocking was she even tried to blame her supposed friends for not defending her from the kids despite the principal hearing the whole exchange. The girls told them about the offer to which their parents bluntly said, "You would be fools not to accept." With heavy hearts and sorry looks in their eyes, both girls were asking for forgiveness for the bad treatment. They hoped they could make amends but wanted a chance. Rebecca thought for a second and bluntly said, "You treat everyone with respect and decency. You like someone for being a good person not because they are cute or have influence. You dislike someone because they are jerks not because you are jealous. Is that simple enough?" They agreed and Rebecca held out her hand in friendship. Iris and Francesca were now part of the group. The six were starting to become like their older siblings. After school, they told their parents as soon as they saw them. Their parents were happy, Rebecca and Jessie's sisters were known as good influences and Jenna and Jaimie as two of the best people in the school. Being close to them would be the best thing to happen to Iris and Francesca. Rachel would find herself all alone and without any influence anymore. Rebecca arranged a get together at her house with the girls. They met up with the 8th-grade group and got to know them. The girls eagerly ate up what the girls were saying, enjoying the fact that they could be themselves without Rachel telling them off for being different. They were free to talk and didn't have to do whatever Rachel wanted. They actually had say in matters. Chapter 13: Jaimie's Gang January left and February began. The middle school kids did well on their midterms while John's students started to recover once their parents became involved. Ms. Paula gave him praise for overcoming two problems and going so far as to consider using technology over handouts to expand on her own lessons. The kids started to get excited over the upcoming Valentine's Day dance. This year they were not dressing up, they wanted to save their money for the semi-formal. The girls wore their most comfortable blouses and skirts and the boys wore button down shirts and jeans. This started another fashion trend as more girls and boys imitated their style for the night. For once the parents were in agreement, they loved this trend. No fancy dresses or suits, just the kids dressing smart. John begged to be let out of chaperoning, accepting the job of babysitting Rebecca and the twins over babysitting the kids at the dance. Rebecca asked why he wanted to stay home, John said, "Watching you is easy, I can get more work done and not have to dance with your mom." Rebecca rolled her eyes and said, "Just for that, I ought to call over all the girls and have a slumber party!" Dan popped in at that moment, hearing what she said and replying, "Uh oh, you just kicked the hornet's nest, John! She's going to do it!" Sure enough, she called the girls and set it up for Friday night. Dan and Melanie were going to a hotel while John got stuck watching the six girls all alone. Their moms heard the reason and couldn't control their laughter, offering John their sympathies when he picked up Jaimie and Michael the next day. Jessie really dug in the knife saying, "Thanks for hosting the six of us; we will be easy on you." The sleepover was a hit with the girls. The five hadn't had one in several years, not since Rachel outlawed them when she took over influence calling them "childish" but seemed to ignore the fact that the older girls had them very frequently. Iris and Francesca turned out to be the life of the party with fun ideas for what to do. The girls spent hours playing games and talking. They were proving to be more fun than the girls could have imagined, they already had great insights during talks and were a big help with doing homework. John wasn't too happy to be stuck with six rambunctious "nearly" 12- year-olds. He got plenty of work done but had to frequently go downstairs to the basement entertainment room to calm the girls down. Rebecca was quick to joke, "Sorry but it's your own fault" which the girls all loved laughing at. On Saturday morning as the girls left John's house Rebecca and Jessie proudly whispered, "You two are the best" to Iris and Francesca. Amy and Kelly whispered the same. The girls had nothing to fear from the four, they were now among friends. Jaimie received a phone call two weeks before their winter vacation. Jessica called to confirm her birthday party. She asked if Jenna, Richard, Rebecca, and Stacy were still coming. Jaimie confirmed that and told her that Bryan and Hannah were coming to help with the move. Jessica asked, "Is he the cute boy your dad brought to school?" Jaimie blushed at the description, saying, "Yes, and Hannah spent the day with us in school." Jessica asked about Stacy and Rebecca, being told, "They are our neighbor's daughters. She is dad's closest friend so they are like cousins to us." Jessica asked if they still wanted to come too, saying, "It would have been wrong to leave them with your grandparents." Jaimie asked if her parents were OK with so many out of town people were coming let alone people she had never met, Jessica replied, "A lot of kids don't want to come because of Scott. They would rather have people who want to be there and who have nothing against him come. They like you and your dad and as long as the others are OK with Scott they will be welcomed here." Jaimie was pleased. She told her she would speak with the other kids and let them know about Scott as soon as possible. She would try to get the boys to leave him alone but if Scott was out of line they might have trouble. She also debated telling them about what happened to Scott, Jessica said, "He will surprise you. He's not like that when he's with mom and me, he is a gentleman." Jaimie listened to her and said, "I'll tell them, I don't want any secrets between us and I do know they can tell if I'm keeping something from them. Rebecca won't let me lie." Jessica was relieved. Jaimie thanked her for the invites and hung up. Jaimie called the kids together, Bryan and Hannah included. Once they were all settled in the entertainment room she told them that they were all invited to Jessica's birthday party. She told them that there was going to be someone there that a lot of people didn't like and that they must be on their best behavior. Jenna, Stacy, Richard, and Rebecca were puzzled. Michael blurted out, "No. He can't be there! You know what he did to you! He should be in jail!" Jaimie calmly asked him to calm down. She explained who she was talking about to the others. Bryan and Hannah demanded to know why he was going. Jaimie explained his connection to Jessica, his change in attitude and behavior, and his strict discipline. They didn't believe it, both having seen it for themselves firsthand. Hannah bluntly stated, "A tiger doesn't change his stripes." Jaimie was getting frustrated. She reached the point of no return and finally asked, "Do you want to know the real truth or are you so far gone about him that you won't accept reality?" Michael, Hannah, and Bryan shut up. Jaimie began, "I promised Jessica I wouldn't tell anyone until the party but Scott and his cousin are close, as close as me and Michael. Scott's mother died several years ago and his father has been a total monster towards him. He constantly beats him for any little thing. He forces him to 'be a man' and 'be the top dog' and if he doesn't like how he is acting he beats him. He constantly berates him and hits him when his grades are good. You should know this better than anyone Michael; you saw how he was in dad's classes. He forces him to beat up on weaker kids so Scott appears tougher than anyone else. That's why he beat me up, his dad forced him to. When he didn't do a good enough job he hit him with a belt." Jaimie gathered her wits and calmed herself. She started again, "Jessica found out the truth after his dad beat him up for not putting me permanently in the hospital. She has kept his injuries from her parents but it's getting harder to do so. Scott is starting to become the smallest kid in his class and his dad is getting tougher on him. She is trying her hardest to keep him over her house but his dad is getting wise. She wants him there so Dad can help him. She knows he has to help him and knows who to call and where to go. She wants us to help him out. Please, just try to help him." All seven were silently thinking. Jenna was the first to say something asking, "We saw how bad people can be with Will, why shouldn't Scott be any different?" Michael wasn't convinced saying, "Why should we help him? I can understand everyone else but why me and you? He tormented us for two years." Jaimie asked, "You should know better than anyone why I want to help him. Seriously, think about it. It isn't hard, he needs help and nobody is able to help him like us. If you were in the same position, would you want someone to help you? I am not asking you to forget the past, I am asking you to put it aside and do the right thing. We have to do for Scott what dad did for me." Michael thought it over, seriously lost in thought. Bryan and Hannah asked, "What about his friends? Are those boys still involved?" Jaimie simply said, "They won't have anything to do with him. The day I gave our class my parting gifts Philip and Jason beat him up for not standing up for them when they were suspended for what they said to me. Scott wouldn't fight back, the two now bully everyone in the school. They are even worse than Scott was. If the abuse got out he'd be tormented in school and beaten worse at home. From what Jessica has said I don't think he can last much longer. I don't want to think about what he might do to himself to make it stop." Stacy asked, "What if we talked with him? You guys are too involved; we are the only ones there without a connection to that place or to anyone there so why don't we talk with him." Rebecca added, "He can't lie to me; you know I can see right through people." The others agreed, letting Jaimie call Jessica to set up the plan. Jessica was happy they were helping Scott and loved that Stacy and Rebecca were going to do that for him on their behalf. The kids started planning for the trip immediately. They packed for both a party and for heavy work. They pooled their resources and bought her a matching necklace, pendant, bracelet, ring, and earring set. They didn't add their names to the card, simply signed it, "The Winnisimmet Kids". John packed the gift with his own special gift, a personalized gold pendant set with her birthstone and diamonds. Valerie was a bit jealous, but John said, "It's a parting gift, it should be special." The kids were on their best behavior for the next week. They did all of their homework and participated in class. They helped out more in the classroom and helped their classmates. Their teachers were surprised at their behavior, but when told the real reason why they were so good they shook their heads saying, "It figures, it's either wanting something or being forced to do it, never on their own." John got asked by Bryan and Hannah's teachers why they had a sudden change in personality. John attributed it to the upcoming trip but sensed they might be on to something. Hannah was normally good with her work but she wasn't as sassy as normal. Bryan paid closer attention to his homework and asked more questions; normally he participated but didn't actively engage in class. The two only did that when they were trying hard not to think about something that is going on. Friday afternoon the group gathered at the Finn home for the flight out. All 12 people piled into two taxis and headed to the airport. The flight was slower than normal, or at least it seemed that way with Cat shuffling in John's lap the whole time. Valerie was luckier, JD slept the whole time. Joseph and Evelyn met them at the baggage claim and gave a round of hugs to the group. They rode in two cars to the house and sat down to a late dinner as they unwound for the evening. Joseph set out the itinerary for the week. He had a retirement/going away party that he wanted the kids to go to. John volunteered to watch the six non-relatives citing, "School work" as his excuse. Joseph didn't buy it but let him off the hook. Rebecca asked why he lied, John said, "I didn't lie, I just bent the truth. I do have work to do, it's just not urgent." Rebecca rolled her eyes saying, "I'll remember that one." Stacy, Jenna, and Richard all giggled and asked if they could use that excuse at home. Joseph next gave out the sleeping arrangements. The three boys were in one room. Rebecca, Stacy, and Hannah were in another, while Jaimie and Jenna were in the last. The boys were told, "No funny business" as the kids looked at Richard who blushed in embarrassment. Chapter 14: Party Time The kids were up early the next day. They discussed the plan quietly while the adults slept. Jessica texted them that Scott was on board with the plan and expected the interrogation. She also said that he was ready for whatever the boys were going to do, he wouldn't fight back. Michael and Jaimie shared concerned looks; if he wasn't going to fight he wasn't the same Scott they knew. John could hear the kids discussing something in the other room. Valerie sensed something was up as well, asking John, "What are they planning and should I have bail money ready?" John could only make out "Scott" but didn't hear anything decipherable; he could only reply, "It's something about Scott. He isn't the same boy he used to be. Whatever it is they are planning it involves him and it's not revenge. I think there's something going on but they are keeping this close to the vest." Valerie asked, "Do you think he is changed? It's been a year and a half." John shook his head saying, "He acted very different the last time I saw him. He was trying to tell me something but couldn't get the words out. Kids grow up, but the way they are talking it might be a case of 'why' instead of 'if'. I don't like this cloak and dagger planning, but we know these kids and they wouldn't do something like this unless it was for a very good reason. We better be ready for anything just in case there is trouble." Joseph and Evelyn also heard the planning and listened to John's comments. Joseph added, "That boy is well known for his antics. Is it even possible he could be anything but trouble?" John nodded, saying, "I know several who were like him. They grew out of it or were given new leases on life. These kids know more than they are letting on, Jaimie would be scared and the boys would be itching for a fight but for whatever reason, they aren't. It's as if they know what will happen already and are waiting for something." The voices stopped and the kids came out of the room. They looked at the adults and tried their best to not look guilty. In a stroke of perfect timing, the twins decided to wake up giving them a needed breather and allow them to get their stories straight. When finally asked what going on the girls said they were figuring out what to say to the others while the boys were making plans for the week. None of the adults bought it but it but they didn't let on. They ate in an awkward silence before departing for the party. Valerie and the twins would only stay a short time, just long enough to show them off and let the kids ogle them. John was on his own for the bulk of the party. John made them swear to be on their best behavior, especially the boys. Jessica greeted the group as they arrived, giving Jaimie and Michael a big hug. Jaimie introduced the group with Richard being the last one. Jessica grabbed his hand and dragged him into the back yard with the others in tow. A group of girls swarmed him, peppering him with questions. Richard gave Jaimie pleading looks, but she was too busy laughing to help. After a few minutes, Jessica managed to pull him away bringing Jaimie and Michael forward while Richard took a breather. Jenna teased him saying, "Most guys would kill to have a group of girls swarm all over him." Jaimie and Michael introduced the rest of the group. Jenna got a big hug from Jessica's closest friends, most of whom she had met the previous year. Bryan was once again ogled by the girls, with one saying, "He's more handsome than I remember." Bryan blushed deeply as the girls swooned. Hannah tried her hardest to contain her laughter but failed as two started to bat eyes at him. The girls seemed to forget who Hannah was until Jessica said, "She was in our class for two days helping before Jaimie left school for good. You don't remember the tall girl helping us? She practically saved two of you from failing math!" Hannah didn't mind not being remembered, she said, "I don't blame you, I wanted to forget that trip as well." Bryan tried to dig in at Hannah to make her more uncomfortable talking about Pete. Hannah shot back, "Don't be jealous of him for having a girlfriend, it's your own fault you haven't gone for Paige yet" Bryan's big grin eroded as the girls looked at him with pity. The former knight in shining armor was cut down to size by his sister. Stacy and Rebecca were introduced as, "Our cousins." Jessica gave them hugs and told them, "Jaimie told me all about you, although it's hard to comprehend what she means by 'cousins'." Jaimie explained as the two were looked at oddly, Jessica saying, "You mean your mom and her dad are best friends?" The two nodded, adding, "And have been so since they were our age." Rebecca added, "If you are as close as siblings wouldn't you call them 'niece and nephew' instead of 'best friend's son or daughter'?" Jessica got the connection, but some of her friends still didn't realize it. Rebecca just lets it go, opting instead to let them continue talking while she went off with the boys. Sometimes she just didn't understand girls, thankful that Jessie and the others, "Got" her. Rebecca looked over the yard and saw a boy sitting all alone. Seeing some semblance to Jessica she assumed he was Scott. He was wearing a heavy hooded sweatshirt, trying hard not to get noticed by anyone but clearly being glared at by Michael. She whispered, "I'm going in" to Michael giving him the signal to back off, but remaining close by. Richard wished her luck, keeping a close eye on her while also paying attention to what the girls were doing. Scott looked at Rebecca as she sat down next to him. She wasted no time and asked, "I'm Jaimie's cousin Rebecca. Is what Jessica said true?" Scott tried to evade the question asking, "What are you talking about?" Unfazed Rebecca asked again, "Is what Jessica said about you true?" Scott tried to be coy and said, "Yes I used to beat up Jaimie." Rebecca shook her head and calmly said, "Not that, the other stuff about you." Scott winced at her knowing the truth. Rebecca lifted up his sweatshirt and gasped. She was fighting the urge to hug him. Scott pulled back trying to hide his back. Michael and Richard walked over and asked, "Was she telling the truth?" Rebecca had tears in her eyes and nodded finally adding, "Those aren't from a hand, and they are really bad." She lost it and hugged him. He needed their help badly. Michael and Richard sat down next to Scott. Michael gave him a few minutes to regain composure before he asked, "Did he make you hurt her?" Scott couldn't form any words, giving a light nod while waiting for Michael's inevitable punches. Michael shook his head saying, "I can't hurt you; I promised Jaimie I wouldn't and I can't hurt someone who is hurt. I'd be no better than you were." Scott tried to say thank you but no words could form. Michael got the gist of his motions and nodded back. Scott was safe, despite two years of mental torture and bullying at Scott's hands, Michael wouldn't hurt him. Richard wasted no time and asked, "Did you have anything against Jaimie or was this just to stop him from hitting you?" Scott was on the verge of tears barely getting out, "When mom died dad made me hurt her to send a message to other kids. When someone saved me from drowning in the pool he started to hit me harder. He kept making me until this fall when the boys were bigger than me. With nobody else to beat up, dad has been trying to find any reason to hit me. I don't like doing it. If I get beat up he beats me harder. I am tired of the pain." Stacy came over and saw Scott and Rebecca on the verge of tears. She asked, "It's true?" The trio nodded as she sat down next to him. Scott looked up at her and there was a sudden change in him. He saw someone with compassion, someone without hate. He couldn't stop staring into her eyes. Rebecca cleared her throat but Scott didn't pay attention to her. Rebecca got up and left the two lovebirds, letting Stacy take her seat. Stacy looked into his eyes and saw pain and suffering. She put her arms around Scott to comfort him, his face melted into a near smile. Richard and Michael looked on dumbfounded. Stacy was working magic and Scott had a clear crush. The three decided to give them some space and let Scott recover. Rebecca found Jessica and whispered, "He's legitimate and the boys are OK with him. That animal you call an uncle needs to be put down." Jessica whispered back, "Where's your sister?" Rebecca could only mutter a terse, "With Scott." Jaimie and Jenna came over to see what the two were whispering about, asking, "Where's Stacy?" Rebecca rolled her eyes and pointed at the now smiling Scott and the blushing Stacy. Jaimie wasted no time blurting out, "No way!" Jenna shook her head saying, "She always goes for the worst guys." Jessica took offense to what Jenna said, "Scott is a nice guy. He isn't what you think he is, the real Scott listens and is funny." Jaimie explained about Stacy's bad dates watching as Jessica's face turned to horror. She watched Stacy and Scott and saw something in him she hadn't seen before. Jessica smiled and said, "Scott is in love." Jaimie and Jenna looked and watched his face and eyes; they were focused on Stacy's face, not on her body, hands, or legs. He never moved, just stared into her eyes. He was a gentleman, he showed he cared for her and listened to everything she was saying. Jenna grew embarrassed, conceding, "That's not the way boys have acted before. Only Michael and Richard have ever acted that way. She might have found a nice guy and sadly she is leaving the state in eight days!" Jaimie watched closely and agreed. Stacy and Scott were enjoying their time together and he never once turned away from her face. The two had a mutual attraction that few others had, she had only seen something like that in her parents and that was one that formed over time. Across the yard, John watched the group's activities with an eye on Scott. He noticed that he acted completely different than the boy who was constantly teasing his classmates. He wasn't much bigger than he used to be, he used to be tall but now is about average height. The way he acted was like night and day. When Rebecca sat down next to him he started to ease up but was still tense. He noted she did something odd with his sweatshirt, seeing a shocked look and a gave him a quick hug. The boys come over to say a few things and sat next to him. Whatever fear he was showing evaporated as they talked, there was something going on with the kids. The oddest thing was Stacy. She sat down and talked with him, getting close and hugging him. His eyes were always on her face, he had a, "Deer in the headlights" look. There was an attraction to each other evident in their actions. John snapped a picture and texted it to Valerie and Melanie. Both said, "I think he is in love." Stacy was acting differently. Normally she is reluctant to be around boys but there is something about her reaction to Scott as well as the conversation that wasn't normal. It was as if he was bringing out the real Stacy, one that had been hidden for a long time. John texted Melanie saying, "She is different with him" to which he got a reply of, "Look at his face he isn't interested in sex just her." John cringed at that but it looked like the truth. Scott wasn't interested in sex; he just wanted a real friend. Stacy was doing what nobody else had done. John's interest in Scott wasn't lost on Jessica's mother. Greta was also watching Rebecca and the others interact with him. John asked her, "What is going on with him? He isn't the boy I remember." She got a look of disgust on her face. John asked, "Did I say something wrong?" Greta apologized saying, "It's not you. He is different when he is here when he is at school or home his father makes him act differently. You saw him as the bully, doing his father's bidding trying to ensure his father's version of what people should be. Here he is free to be himself and is a sweet, kind boy. He and his cousin are inseparable but in school, he torments her. She doesn't hold it against him, she loves him too much." John noticed a change in her tone as she talked about Scott's father. John asked, "I only know him through school. What's his history, there's more to this that I need to grasp." She quietly said, "My twin sister died three years ago and after that time Scott changed. He went from being the boy you see to the boy you knew. His father was responsible for it. Scott never complains, though, at least not to me. I have told him many times we are here for him if he ever needs it but he won't open up to what is really happening." John could see this was painful and let the questioning stop. Greta thanked him for letting her get it out. She suddenly pointed at Scott and said, "This is new. He has never acted like that before." She saw Scott looking at Stacy as she talked with a smile on his face and her hand in his. Greta asked about Stacy, John told her their connection but added, "This is new for her too; she has been reluctant to talk with boys after what her dates did to her." Greta sensed there was more to their connection, Scott looked infatuated with her and Stacy was reacting the same way. The two were more than friends. Greta noted the time and called everyone close to open presents. Jessica nearly cried at the gift from the group, hugging all of them while saying, "I'll miss you guys." She opened up John's gift and openly wept. She ran to him and hugged him, saying, "Thank you" over and over again. John hugged back, letting her cry herself out before getting the rest of the party going. Valerie came with the twins to pick up the group. Jessica and the group posed for several pictures with her friends and with the twins before breaking up for the evening. Jessica asked when they were leaving, asking if they could have a small going away party before they left. John was reluctant but the kids all asked him to go for it. Jessica thanked them for this adding, "It'll just be us four" pointing to Scott and her parents. John saw the kids smiling and thought something was up again. The week was a flurry of packing and loading. Valerie had her hands full with the twins leaving Evelyn to oversee the packing. John oversaw the loading with Joseph getting off the hook to tie up loose ends at his office. On Wednesday Bryan and Hannah had a rare argument, the others almost dropping their boxes in shock. John burst into laughter; the twins grew embarrassed and ended whatever they were arguing about. Valerie asked what the commotion was; cursing to herself that she missed that rare moment. The kids eventually had to sleep on the floor in sleeping bags as the last of the furniture was packed away. They didn't mind too much but would have preferred to have a group camp-out in the living room. The adults gave them an adamant "No" at the idea, citing their parents would not allow it. Meals were now fast food and delivery. The kids didn't mind that, although the four newcomers to the area were a little reluctant to try food from chains they hadn't heard of. Michael and Jaimie assured them, "It's good food, just new, it may not be Kurtz pizza bagels or Kelsie's roast beef but it's still good." Hannah bluntly said, "You don't want to eat in town. The people aren't that nice and the last thing I want is for Uncle John to have another argument with someone who can't grasp the fact that other states have different school schedules." Joseph's party went well. Valerie and the twins were the centers of attention from the wives and children while John's absence was noted with disappointment. Joseph explained why with his former colleagues giving him odd looks but Joseph brushed off the looks saying, "John isn't one for parties and would gladly babysit than attend a party with people he doesn't know even if it's in my honor. The man puts kids first so it would be odder if he had actually come." By Saturday everything was ready to go. The last items to pack were items they needed to keep out until last. The group prepared for the party later with Jessica and Jaimie in constant contact. Scott was constantly talking about Stacy, who in turn was talking about Scott. Rebecca was on the verge of tearing her hair out in frustration, saying, "Jaimie you owe me big time!" Chapter 15: Going Away and Coming Back Saturday morning Jaimie and Jessica were texting away finalizing their plans. Stacy was giddy, eager to see Scott and eager to get home and tell the others about him. Jessica said Scott was the same way, talking her ear off about Stacy. The two swore that this plan had better work or there would be two broken hearts and a lot of trouble to deal with. After a quiet breakfast, John and Valerie drove the group to Jessica's house. She greeted them and warmly invited them inside. John and Greta exchanged shared looks noting they were almost too eager to meet up. Scott came out and met with the group, taking the boys into the yard and starting a game of basketball. The lack of any animosity by Michael or Bryan was noted by Valerie and John, there was clearly something going on among them. The girls chatted away and split from the boys leaving John and Greta to watch the game while Valerie watched over the girls. About 10 minutes into the game Richard signaled Michael and Bryan who bumped into Scott, "Accidentally" showing the marks on his back. The boys did it again with Scott wincing in pain. Scott gave them a knowing look, he could see John staring closely at him. It worked. John swore under his breath and signaled Greta to come over, then asked Scott to come to them. John had his serious look on and asked Scott to lift his shirt and show them his back. Scott complied and listened as the two adults gasped in shock at the sight. The boys stopped what they were doing and waited for John to say something. Greta was the first to speak, saying, "Where did these come from?" Scott quietly said, "Dad." John asked, "How long has this been going on for?" Scott again quietly said, "Since mom died." Valerie and the girls heard the boys stop and the group walked outside to listen. John turned to the nine kids and asked them with a fury in his voice, "Did you know about this?" All ten of the kids nodded. He asked them sternly, "How long have you known?" Jaimie, sensing the jig was up blurted out, "They were only told two weeks ago. I have known since early January." John shook his head at the realization of what they had done. He lined the kids up and berated them, "You knew about this for six weeks and didn't try to tell me? You know you can always come to me for help. He needed help and because of this hesitation, you may have hurt him worse. Don't ever hesitate to tell me something is wrong, you know I will go out of my way to help you or anyone in need. You have Jessica's phone number, all you had to do was tell me and let me call her mother to get him help." The kids looked down in shame, John reassured them, "Your hearts were in the right place, but you six are on diaper duty." He turned to Richard and Jenna and added, "And you two are going to have to wait for your punishments. I have to tell your parents about this, it's too important to let slide" Greta gave John a chance to calm down and asked Jessica, "How long have you known?" Jessica blurted out, "From the start. He swore me to secrecy; I didn't want uncle to hurt him more." Jessica started to cry; Valerie took the other kids inside while John had a talk with Jessica, Scott, and Greta. John was concerned more than angered. He quietly said, "We need to get him to the doctor; he needs to get away from his father immediately." Greta agreed but said she feared the backlash that was coming on Monday when the town gossips made their presence known. John thought for a minute and asked, "I have a strong feeling that the kids planned this to happen exactly the way I am going to offer. What if the four of you come east for a few months? Let Scott and Jessica finish school with the kids and then you can decide what to do and where to go. This town will tear him apart. I fear Jessica will get targeted by the town's scumbags as well. It's not safe for either of them here anymore." Greta thought it was a good idea but said, "My husband will have a problem with it; he would have to change jobs." John asked if he could transfer, saying, "His firm has an office in Boston, I know someone who is in charge there. I'll ensure they do a lateral transfer for him." Greta agreed, giving him the details. John looked them over and said, "Just who I thought it was, the school renovation project was done with his firm and your husband had to have been in contact with him. He owes me a favor; this is the perfect time to call it in. It helps that the two know each other already." Valerie came out again and was brought up to speed. She and Greta discussed what their next move was and agreed the kids go with them while she and Quentin finished up in Newhall. She and John would get them registered for school and find Scott a therapist. John called his sister who agreed to watch the kids until Greta and her husband could come east. Greta asked if she had any experience with kids like Scott. Valerie smiled and told her about Will which eased Greta's mind. Scott and Jessica wouldn't be alone in this, they'd have someone who empathized with them. Scott went with John, Valerie, and Greta to the hospital while Jessica and the other kids were left with the Johnsons. Joseph tried to ease the tension and assure the kids they weren't in real trouble. Evelyn tried her hardest to keep the kids occupied and had them tell Jessica stories about the city which Jenna and Richard were all too eager to do. At the hospital, Scott was shown to a private room while being examined. Social services were immediately called and a deputy was dispatched to take their statements. When he arrived the deputy assigned took one look at Scott and asked, "Is this a joke?" Valerie quietly and methodically informed him that, "This is no joke; this is a child who has been systematically abused for three years who finally came forward. If you are unable to put your prejudice against him aside please leave and dispatch another deputy and then start looking for a job because we will ensure that you will not be wearing that badge come Monday morning." The deputy realized who she was and knew she wasn't kidding. He carefully took statements from everyone there and had them go over their statements word for word to ensure accuracy. He then asked Valerie in a shaky voice, "Is this to your liking?" Valerie said, "It is satisfactory." The deputy then stood out of the way awaiting social services. After an hour someone from social services showed up. He looked around the room and let out a loud, "Long time no see, John." Mark Sylvester, Jaimie's former social worker and the person who went out of his way to look out for Jaimie as she started her transition greeted the group, shaking John's hand and hugging Valerie. He looked at Scott and asked, "What's going on here? He's the last person I would expect you to help." Scott winced in shame but John reassured him, "That was before we found out the boy has been beaten by his father for years and only did what he did to avoid being hurt. It's hard to stay angry at a child who was only doing something to stop getting beaten and please his abuser." Mark gave him a quizzical look. John motioned for Scott to remove his shirt and show him the marks. Mark stepped back in horror. This was no joke and this was bad, one of the worst cases of abuse Mark had seen in his time as a social worker. John bluntly said, "Eventually you'd beat your own mother if you had to put up with this kind of abuse." Mark asked who the woman was with him; she introduced herself as his aunt. Mark asked the deputy if he got their statements and was given a nod. Mark asked the doctor if he had given his statement and he too nodded. Mark then stated, "I'll call the judge immediately, it's clear what is going on. I'm leaving him into the care of his aunt. I am seeking that she be given full and permanent custody and going to seek a restraining order against his father on his behalf. That bastard won't get within a mile of him without a set of handcuffs being placed on him." John told him about their plans. Mark listened and asked, "Are you sure you want to do that?" Greta and Scott nodded, with Greta saying, "Scott knows better than anyone about this town, he needs to get as far away as he can and we agreed that John's suggestion is best. John's older sister agreed to watch the children until we are able to fully move." Mark questionably asked, "Is she reliable?" Valerie stated, "She recently had temporary guardianship of an abuse victim who is friends with our children, she knows how to deal with it. She is experienced in childcare having helped raise our niece and nephew and also John." Mark signed off on the plan with Scott released to their care, giving Scott reassurances that his father will never see him again. The group arrived back at the Johnson home late. The kids were still up and told the news. John told them that they would be staying with Leslie until Greta and Quentin were finished here. Greta arrived with Jessica's things while Scott was given his overnight bag. John looked at his meager possessions and said, "We will get you what you need back east, don't worry about a thing." Scott and Stacy were separated much to the amusement of the others as the group called it a night but with few getting any real sleep. Sunday morning John called Dorothy Vega and let her know what happened. She had the same reaction Mark had but listened intently. John was going to be allowed to sign off on the transfer so the kids could start school on Tuesday. John would have to help get them up to speed if they were behind on anything. Dorothy also said that Scott would be allowed to forgo gym class if he felt his injuries were going to be a problem. Scott was adamant that he not get special treatment, demanding to be allowed to participate. The flight home was tense as the kids awaited their punishments. Scott and Stacy sat next to each other and talked the whole journey. Rebecca had to tell them several times to, "Tone down the love fest" only to be ignored. Valerie was on the verge of tears; Stacy had never been so close with anyone especially not a boy. John whispered, "He might finally be the perfect boy for her" to which Valerie whispered, "If he isn't, I fear she might never find one as good as him." The two watched as they held hands which again Stacy initiated. Rebecca noticed the hand holding and whispered, "You better not hurt her or we will make sure you never have another girlfriend." Scott looked down and noticed they were holding hands, pulling away and blushing. Stacy glared at her sister, Rebecca just reiterated, "If he is going to date you, he has to hear the same warning all the other boys get." Stacy looked at Richard, Bryan, and Michael who nodded in agreement. John and Valerie looked at each other and smiled, she was finally over those horrible date experiences. All it took was someone who didn't want anything from her except companionship. Rebecca rolled her eyes and said, "When I date I'm taking dad. At least with him, all I have to worry about is affording bail money." Stacy and the others giggled as Scott gulped in fear. The plane landed and the group was met by several angry looking parents. Karen, Olivia, and Anne were furious. Anne asked Melanie if she and Dan needed someone else to change diapers, Olivia doing the same and adding yardwork. Jenna and Richard tried to plead but were told, "If they have to do it, you have to do it too." Melanie tried to stifle her laughter but finally said, "Your hearts were in the right place, your heads weren't. Just be glad John asked for leniency on your behalf." Melanie noticed Stacy and Scott holding hands and raised an eyebrow. John whispered, "Just let it go, he needs her as much as she needs him." Melanie asked, "Do you trust him?" John nodded, saying, "They have been inseparable since they met. Stacy hasn't been her quiet, miserable self. For the first time in a long time, she's happy and has kept him from breaking down emotionally. Rebecca has kept a close eye on them so she will tell you everything anyway." Melanie called Scott over and hugged him, saying, "Whatever you are doing, please keep it up. Stacy is happy again." Scott looked at John for help but he simply smiled. Dan appeared and saw his daughter holding hands with a stranger. Dan demanded an explanation; Melanie pulled him back and said, "That's the new boy I was telling you about. They are close and you are going to cause major damage if you go after him now. This isn't all about Stacy he needs her and you better back off." Dan glared at Scott who shied away in fear but offered his hand to him. Dan leaned in and said, "We know about you, but that is my little girl and if you hurt her they will never find your body." Rebecca leaned in and said, "He always says that but doesn't mean it. Just don't do anything to make him angry and you have nothing to fear." John leaned in saying, "He likes you already, normally it takes a while to get to the point of threats He usually just glares at you until you break." Leslie appeared and was introduced to Scott and Jessica. She told them, "Tomorrow the kids have school but you will have to wait until Tuesday to join them. You will be given some things to do but it will be boring for you. Just try to relax; the city will take a little getting used to so I don't expect you to sleep well tonight." Jessica asked what she meant, Jaimie whispered, "It can be loud and scary" to her. Karen, Olivia, and Anne questioned the kids about the party and the move. They wanted to know if they were on their best behavior. John told them exactly what Joseph said and what he made them do regarding the sleeping arrangements. Both laughed at the kids' reactions but smiled at the man's foresight. Olivia joked, "They might be kids but they are still hormone driven." The group drove to John's house where they put the twins to sleep and split up for the night. Melanie and Dan still pressing John for information about Scott and Stacy. They couldn't help but notice she was practically floating home with a smile on her face. Whatever he had said to her during the week changed her. Rebecca admitted, "He didn't say much he just listened and looked at her face the whole time. He didn't stare at her body, only into her eyes. They talked about everything and anything but he never stopped looking at her eyes." Melanie couldn't believe it. Scott was acting like no other boy had and Stacy had fallen hard for it. Dan asked, "What about his hands?" Rebecca grumbled, "He kept them at his sides at all times. Stacy was the one who grabs his hand. He never notices it; he keeps looking at her face." Dan looked at Melanie who was swooning. Dan asked, "Any way to keep him locked up until she's 18?" John gave a resounding, "No, and the convent won't accept her either." Melanie laughed, her baby girl was clearly in love. The next morning in Newhall, Missouri there was a special hearing in front of Judge Steven Mitchell. Greta and Mark were there on behalf of Scott. Judge Mitchell heard the facts about the situation and was shown the pictures taken by the doctors. He read the deputy's report and asked Greta if the facts were accurate. He noticed something odd on one of the statements. He looked it over twice and asked Mark, "Is this the same John Finn that won the right to adopt a transgender girl?" Mark shot back, "Yes he is, his daughter was the one who brought the abuse to Greta and his attention." Judge Mitchell asked if there was any way to contact him. Greta checked the time and said, "He doesn't have much time at the moment but here is his number." Judge Mitchell stepped into his chambers and dialed. John went to school as normal but was on edge. He was waiting for word from either Mark or Greta regarding Scott. During a break between class periods, John's phone rang. To his surprise it wasn't either of the two people he was waiting to hear from, it simply read, "County of Hadley". John assumed the worst and answered. On the other end Judge Mitchell, the judge who presided over John's custody case almost two years before. Judge Mitchell was to the point saying, "I received a case this morning that shocked me. I noticed the victim's name and saw who one of the witnesses to the incident was. I know you are trustworthy so I want to hear the story from you directly." John reiterated what he saw and what Scott and Jessica told him. Judge Mitchell asked, "In your opinion, was it abuse?" John without hesitation stated, "Yes, the welts and cut marks were from a belt or some other object. The bruises were from an adult's hand. The wounds were both very recent and at least several months old, with several spots overlapping to the point of being indecipherable." Judge Mitchell listened to every word, and asked, "How did you come to recognize marks?" John admitted, "required college courses, research into abuse, and the past and recent personal experience with blunt force and hand-based injuries." Judge Mitchell asked, "Am I to understand the child is out of state?" John admitted, "Yes, with the consent of Mark Sylvester he and his cousin are staying with my sister until his aunt and uncle are able to finish moving their home out here. He is going to receive counseling as well as finish school among my son and daughter as well as their friends, all of which are experienced with this kind of trauma." Judge Mitchell asked him to elaborate; John said, "We had a recent abuse incident that was similar to this. A father assaulted his son in front of all of the children before being restrained and arrested. Due to his mother being out of state at the time my sister was asked to oversee him until her return. The children are also experienced with this through my son and daughter so they will be among friends." Judge Mitchell laughed and said, "Exactly what I expected, they are in good hands. His aunt will be given full and permanent custody, the state will transfer his case to Massachusetts social services to ensure his well-being, and his father will be barred from ever contacting his son again." John thanked him for his help. Judge Mitchell started to get personal asking, "Would you mind if I asked about Jaimie? How has she been?" John told him the condensed story about the past year. He mentioned the twins and the kids being forced to change diapers as punishment for not telling him about the abuse. Judge Mitchell was on the verge of laughter and had to go before he lost control. He added, "I might check in on Scott to ensure he is doing well, but he is in good hands, though." Jake Bollinger stopped John in the hall after his conversation. Jake asked, "What's this about a call from a judge? Are you in some sort of legal trouble?" He looked concerned but John said, "It's not what you think, the judge wanted to verify statements regarding an abuse case that I was witness to in Missouri over vacation." Jake looked shocked and asked, "Who is the victim?" John quietly replied, "He was the boy who used to abuse Jaimie. Jaimie and his cousin managed to wiggle the situation so I would have to help him get away from his father's constant abuse." Jake asked for the whole story, cringing at moments and smiling at others. Jake gave John a big slap on the back saying, "That kid found the best person possible to help him, I am glad the judge agreed with that." John nodded his head and excused himself, getting to his class just before he himself was late. The students asked about that judge thing. John told them, "Just simple fact verification since I couldn't do it in person he called me direct. Everything checked out fine and the person was given what they needed." The students pressed him. John tried to fight it but finally gave in and said, "My daughter's friend asked for her help in getting me to assist her cousin in getting away from his abusive father. We were able to get him the help he needed and the call was simply the judge overseeing the case asking for my side of the story. He is in this state now among people who can help him and away from the torment and danger that his old town would bring. I ask that you please drop this, it's something personal that I don't want talked about." The students agreed with him but got the gist of what he said. He was helping someone in need and it wasn't something that should be openly talked about by others. They left it alone out of respect for him. Chapter 16: New Beginnings for an Old Foe That afternoon after John finished his last class Leslie came by to drop off Scott and Jessica. The two were excited yet scared; John had to assure them they were fine. They walked to John's car then drove to the middle school. Dorothy Vega met them at her office and handed John the forms to sign. Dorothy asked to speak with the kids alone allowing John some quiet while he filled out the paperwork. Dorothy got to the point and told Scott she wouldn't tolerate his old behavior. She assured him that his situation was one they had dealt with before and that the kids were ready to help. She had spoken with his new teachers and gave them the story with them also on the lookout for his old behavior. Scott nodded in agreement as Jessica watched silently. Scott tried his best to remain silent but blurted out, "I'm sorry. I truly am sorry for what I did. I didn't want to do it and I know I don't have to fear dad anymore so I won't do it. Please just let me forget about it." Jessica put her arms around him and said something to him quietly which calmed him. Dorothy looked at him closely to see if he was being sincere, finally saying, "OK. You have a fresh start here. What you did before shouldn't impact what you can do now. Just be careful, you have help from a lot of people so you aren't going through this alone. The kids want to help and will do so if you let them." Jessica asked about herself. Dorothy had almost forgotten about her, she looked at her and couldn't fathom what to say. She was acting as his protector yet she all but ignored him when she was their principal. Dorothy asked, "What made you start protecting Scott?" Jessica boldly said, "I always have, but when uncle was around Scott wouldn't let me help for fear that he might do something to me." Dorothy saw she was telling the truth and said, "Jaimie spoke highly of you two which means a lot. I expect you two to get up to speed quickly so you don't fall behind. Good luck in school." John reentered seeing Dorothy talking with the kids. John asked, "Are they OK?" She nodded as John handed her the paperwork. She congratulated them on becoming students and showed them out. Outside the other parents were waiting for them. John introduced them while the kids looked on at the schoolyard. Claire's mother Lilly asked if the kids knew they were going to be here, John simply nodded saying, "They were there when I called yesterday." Courtney's mother Gabby asked if he was Stacy's new boyfriend, Scott turned red in embarrassment as John nodded again. The bell rang and within minutes the yard was filled with kids. Jaimie and the group rushed to Scott and Jessica's side, introducing them to Courtney, Claire, and Will. Courtney said, "He is cute Stacy, no wonder you like him." Both turned red as their hands found one another. John asked Will to come over, telling him that he hoped he could talk with Scott for a while. Will and Scott walked off while the others tried not to watch. Courtney and Claire talked with Jessica about the school with Courtney showing her what they were doing in class. Jessica asked about the teachers, Jenna chimed in, "They are good but not great. Mr. Poland is strict; he goes by the book and forces you to know the concepts and definitions." The others grumbled about that. Jessica asked Jaimie, "Is he anything like your dad?" Jaimie and Michael both blurted out, "No!" Jaimie explained his style vs. her dad's style. Jessica wasn't happy, saying, "I loved Mr. Finn's style. It was easy to learn what he was talking about." Michael added, "Yeah and the group work was fun, but Mr. Poland doesn't like to do that stuff." John and the parents heard their discussion. Gabby asked, "Was she another one of your students?" John nodded saying, "They both were. Jessica didn't stand out, and Scott tried to hide his brilliance behind his tough guy fa?ade." The parents seemed to catch his drift, with Olivia adding, "The poor kid probably didn't get any praise for doing well." Scott and Will stood on a far wall. Will asked, "Did they send you to a therapist yet?" Scott shook his head, saying, "Mr. Finn is taking me soon." Will asked, "Did they tell you about me?" Scott again shook his head, saying, "They mentioned they had experience but didn't elaborate." Will told him his story, mentioning, "Leslie is a good person; enjoy your time with her while you can." Scott asked, "Does she always force you to do schoolwork?" Will laughed and said, "Yep, as soon as I came in the door. No video games or TV until it was done." Scott smiled, he liked Leslie already. Will asked what Scott liked to do. Scott started to tell him his interests and what he participated in back in Missouri. Will joked, "No wonder they put us together." The two hit it off fast. After talking for several more minutes they walked over to the group. John asked how their talk went; Will jokingly said, "Are you trying to replace me already?" The others laughed, John flatly said, "There's a strict 'no return' policy on kids, sorry but we can't replace you. You will have to get used to someone who is similar to you." Will smiled and said, "I like this guy already; we just need to get him a girl." Stacy shot Will a look who then looked at Scott who was blushing. He looked back at Stacy and asked, "How the heck did you manage that? You only knew him a few days and now you two are an item?" Stacy shook her head and grabbed Scott's hand. Will started laughing and hugged her saying, "It's about time. Just don't let your dad overdo it on the fear mongering. He is scary but he can lay it on too thick." Leslie arrived to take Scott and Jessica home. Stacy wanted to come along but was told, "He needs to prepare for tomorrow." Jessica asked if they were really all set for school, John assured her, "Principal Vega just needed my signature, the meeting was more of a seeing is believing event. You two are going shopping now with Leslie for new clothes and supplies, your parents are bringing the rest of your stuff this weekend. Just enjoy the rest of the evening before the fun starts tomorrow." Leslie asked Scott what stores he usually shopped at hoping to get a sense of his style. Scott didn't answer, Jessica answered for him saying, "Mom and Aunt Tiffany did the shopping for him." Leslie nodded and said, "He's old enough to pick out his own clothes and find his own style. A little retail therapy might do wonders for him." Jessica had to tell him what she meant getting a snort in reply. They stopped off first at her old workplace to see what they had. Scott tried on several different styles of shirts and t-shirts, pants and slacks and jeans. He couldn't pin down something definite, liking them all. Jessica asked, "What did you like back home?" Scott pointed at his t-shirt and jeans, Jessica asked, "So why not go with that?" Leslie handed him a few different colors and cuts which Scott tried on and liked. Jessica didn't need help finding her own clothes. She knew what she liked. Leslie left her to try on the blouses and jeans talking with Scott to pass the time. Scott asked, "Why so many clothes?" Leslie laughed saying, "You are here until mid-June, in a few weeks it'll be warm and then hot but snow storms could still happen. The only ones we didn't get are shorts and swimwear." Leslie asked, "Are you going to the school's semi-formal?" Scott looked puzzled but Jessica saved him, "He has no choice; Stacy will be disappointed if he doesn't go." Scott asked what she was talking about so Jessica told him, "It's a big dance where everyone dresses up in suits and fancy dresses, Jaimie showed me pictures of their dance last year." Scott asked when it was, clearly interested. The trio paid for the clothes and headed home. They ate dinner and called it an early night. Leslie told Scott that he had an appointment Tuesday afternoon with a therapist so be ready to go. Tuesday morning Scott and Jessica were up early. They dressed and ate breakfast, grabbed their backpacks and waited for Leslie to get ready. She joked, "You have over an hour until school, calm down." They sat down and tried to relax, only getting more anxious. Scott's phone started vibrating and his face paled. He handed the phone to Leslie who saw the name and answered, "You are in direct violation of your restraining order and this will be reported to social services as well as Judge Mitchell. Do not call this number again." Jessica asked, "uncle?" Scott nodded and fought back tears. Jessica comforted him until he calmed down. Leslie hugged Scott and said, "I'll hold onto this. Valerie will want to see this. We will get you a new phone with a local number, both of you need new ones anyway." Scott asked, "What about the others, they only have that number." Leslie laughed and said, "It's not hard to change someone's number on your phone; you don't need one just yet anyway. Stacy can hold off on her texting for a bit." Jessica stifled a laugh as the three piled into Leslie's car for the drive to school. The other 7 were already waiting for them outside. Within seconds of the group entering Scott and Jessica were introduced to their other classmates. Nobody asked why they were there and none cared, friends of the group were immediately given free passes on scrutiny. The bell rang and Dorothy met the two newcomers. She escorted them to their homeroom, conveniently the same room as the group. Their homeroom teacher greeted them and told them what they had been up to so far and what was expected of them in the upcoming weeks. Their other classes went smoothly. They were actually on par with the others with just one class, science, being slightly behind. Their last class of the day was history and in it, they saw their only trouble. Dorothy escorted the kids to class, talking with them about how their day had gone so far. Mr. Poland sneered at the new students but kept his mouth shut seeing Dorothy's watchful glare. He tried his hardest to avoid looking at Scott and Jessica and barely paid notice to Dorothy. Dorothy said a few words of introduction and added, "And I am sure your teacher will not mind having two lovely new students who have gone through a major trauma recently and thus should not be shown any prejudice. They have asked to be treated as any other students and I expect you to do the same." The kids giggled knowing she called him out on his sneer. Scott and Jessica sat down at the two new seats added for them. Scott took his seat at a table with Eric and George, two acquaintances of the group. Jessica sat with Claire and Courtney. Mr. Poland hated new students and hated to adjust his lessons to accommodate them. He openly complained that he now had to readjust the room for them, taking time away from class because, "You two had to come in." Jaimie and the others were outraged and loudly complained, "They didn't want to be here any more than you want them here." Scott and Jessica tried to hide their fear. Jenna stood up and outwardly said, "You are a teacher, who are you to complain about their circumstances. Grow up and start teaching." Mr. Poland sent her out. The others followed behind, saying the exact same thing. Scott and Jessica joined them so all 10 were sitting crammed on the bench outside the joint principal office. Alice Rodriguez noticed the group and asked, "Mr. Poland?" They nodded as she grew angry. She noticed Scott and Jessica and asked, "I take it he didn't like new students again?" they nodded in unison. She shook her head in frustration saying, "That man doesn't belong in a classroom. He is terrible with students." Dorothy came over and figured out what happened before the kids said anything. She only said, "Did he even try to teach this time?" The kids all said a quiet, "No." She asked what happened with Jaimie telling her everything. She looked at the kids and started to laugh, saying, "Normally this would be cause for suspensions but this is something to overlook. He shouldn't have berated you kids like that, and he certainly was told to not do that. He is aware of the situation yet he chose to complain openly and in front of you two which I won't accept. I'm going to have a talk with him, sit here and finish your other assignments. I'll inform your parents but I won't punish you for standing up to a bully." The group sat silently. They watched as she headed towards the elevator with an indignant look on her face. They did their work and finished their homework with plenty of time left over. They helped Scott and Jessica with their work while keeping an eye out for Dorothy or other teachers. The final bell rang and the kids waited to be released by Dorothy. She escorted them out to their parents who tried hard to look upset but burst into laughter. John and Leslie shook their heads and said, "Principal Vega told us what happened and why you did it. Mr. Poland was given a stern talking to in front of the entire class particularly about violating the school's zero-tolerance policy regarding language and behavior by teachers. He is on thin ice, another problem and he may not return next year." The kids started pouring out of the school. Their classmates ran up to them and asked what their punishment was. Jaimie explained, "We weren't punished, he was in the wrong. She just told us to do our work and let us go when the day ended." Eric and George told what she said in class and how he turned angry. "He said a few things about you being troublemakers and should be suspended. Principal Vega told him he was not only wrong but was on the verge of breaking the rules himself. She said something about conduct and behavior. He tried to demand your suspensions but told him to stop and if he continued he would be removed. He didn't like what she said but stopped." John broke up the group. He said, "He knew what he was doing and he knows what the limits are. He will test them again, but this time he might not like the results." John then said, "Jaimie, Scott it's time to go. We will see you all tomorrow." Jaimie and Scott piled into John's car while the others continued talking. Jaimie told him where they were going, saying, "You will like this place, they are nice people." He asked if she had the same therapist, Jaimie said, "She deals with gender problems, yours deals with other things." Scott understood and hoped she didn't notice him there. Chapter 17: Recovering Scott, Jaimie, and John signed in at the reception desk. Jaimie's appointment came before Scott's so he had a lot to think about beforehand. John sensed his fear and tried to reassure him, saying, "You are in a safe place, nobody will judge you." Jaimie tried to calm him as well but he was still tense. Dr. Eliza came out and saw the three sitting together. Jaimie walked alongside her but Dr. Eliza didn't take her eyes off of John and Scott. Jaimie sensed she was watching John. When they were inside her office Jaimie questionably asked, "Why were you staring at Dad?" Dr. Eliza tried to evade the question but Jaimie insisted. She finally gave up and said, "Your father was talking to that boy, I thought it was odd." Jaimie laughed and said, "That's Scott; Dad is taking him to an appointment with Dr. Dane." When Dr. Eliza asked his relationship to her father, Jaimie got quiet. She was reluctant to tell her about Scott. Dr. Eliza sensed something was going on and asked, "Is there something you need to tell me?" Jaimie didn't like to lie and knew she would get the information out of her eventually so she told her about Scott, about his past with her, about the abuse. Dr. Eliza had a look of pure shock. She couldn't believe what was going on let alone that her patient was close with someone who tormented her for so long. Dr. Eliza composed herself and asked, "Are you sure that is the same boy? The boy you told me about was cruel and vicious." Jaimie was protective of Scott. She bluntly said, "His dad made him do everything. He hates what he made him do and has always regretted doing it. He was not like that before he lost his mom, we were supposed to be friends but his dad forced him to stop. His dad was the one who hated me, Scott liked me. What he used to be is not who he really is let alone what you saw today." Dr. Eliza saw something she never saw before, a pure fury and frustration in Jaimie. Dr. Eliza asked, "Why did you forgive him? Most people would not do so." Jaimie got quiet again and said, "What he did was unforgivable but why he did it is. He is a good person, he is completely different than how he acted. He is scared and needs help. He needs people who understand, support, and more importantly- love him. Jessica and the rest of us wanted him where he could get help and be among people who know what it is like to be hurt like him." Dr. Eliza asked, "What do you mean wanted him where he could get help?" Jaimie knew she caught her in a trap. She told her about the plans and how they orchestrated her dad finding out about the abuse and helping the family. Dr. Eliza looked angry, saying, "You let him suffer for six weeks? Why didn't you tell anyone?" Jaimie said bluntly, "It would have made things worse, he would have been humiliated and bullied and ridiculed. You don't know what it is like over there! He would have done something horrible to himself to escape the pain and humiliation! He told me so himself!" Jaimie was now crying, Dr. Eliza tried to comfort her. She asked, "Would you have told if I told you not to tell?" Dr. Eliza nodded saying, "It's required." Jaimie said, "That's why we didn't tell anyone, nobody would understand like dad did. Mom and dad forced the people out there to listen to him." Jaimie explained what had happened since that time. She told about their punishments and how everyone involved was doing it. She told about the walkout and their teacher getting in trouble. Dr. Eliza giggled at their adventure saying, "10 kids on a bench had to cause some stir" Jaimie nodded but said, "We were lucky, we should have been suspended but weren't" Dr. Eliza proudly said, "There are things worth fighting for, your friends are one of them." The hour passed fast. Dr. Eliza walked Jaimie out and spent a minute watching her interact with Scott. She made a note to check in on his therapist hoping to get the whole story as she still had a lingering fear that he might still be harboring lies or malice towards Jaimie or others. Scott was called and she watched him reluctantly go inside with John close behind for support. Jaimie noticed her staring and shook her head in disappointment, Dr. Eliza took her next appointment but felt a twinge of guilt. In another room, Scott and John were talking with Dr. Dane. John explained the situation and remained with Scott at Scott's request. Dr. Dane asked him to explain in his own words what happened starting from where it began until recently. Scott told him about his mother's death and his dad reverting to his angry self, frustrated with everyone. He mentioned his dad blaming a lot of people for his troubles and seeing him as a disappointment. The disappointment grew to the point that he started to smack him to get him to do whatever he wanted to do, insisting that it was, "Toughening him up." Scott had tears welling up, telling about him demanding he starts acting like a man and get what he wants from people. He told him to take what he needed from the smaller kids, if they couldn't put up a fight then they deserved to have their stuff taken. Scott refused and was continually beaten, with his father saying, "It's for your own good." He mentioned that his father had a strong hatred for Jaimie, calling her, "Sissy, fag, and weirdo" because she was so small and so smart. Mentioning Jaimie brought out a lot of tears, Scott had to stop and start several times. Dr. Dane asked about her, why she was a particular sour spot. Scott mentioned the constant bullying of her, two times being stopped by John. The doctor looked at John who didn't react, holding off emotion for Scott's sake. Scott was barely able to mention the last time, trying not to picture her in the hospital because of him. He told that his father ordered him to beat her so badly she wouldn't think she was a girl anymore and not to come back home until she was dead or in the hospital. Scott looked at John and apologized, grabbing him and holding him tight. Dr. Dane asked about Jaimie, John told him about her and the shared history. Dr. Dane asked why she was so important to Scott, John said, "She is the friend he should have had but was denied, his mother tried to arrange for them to be friends but losing her ended that chance." Dr. Dane asked Scott if he was going to hurt weaker people, Scott meekly replied, "I never wanted to hurt anybody, I only wanted to stop dad from hurting me." He broke completely now, forcing John to move away so he could have some time to himself. Dr. Dane talked with John for a bit while Scott recovered. John told him that Scott was a different person in class; he often showed that he was smart and inquisitive and listened to what you were saying. In class, he didn't bully the kids. He often followed someone else's lead, though, trying hard to suppress his brilliance. Once outside the classroom he changed, he became a bully who picked on the younger kids. Dr. Dane made notes about this and asked, "Do you believe his story about his father forcing him?" John bluntly said, "I have seen the marks on his back if given the choice between putting up with that kind of abuse and bullying smaller kids I'd choose the bullying. We aren't exaggerating when we said get him away from his father and he's a new person. He isn't afraid to be himself and tries to be a good person to others." Scott heard what John said and lifted his shirt to show the marks. Dr. Dane looked at John who had a clear, "I told you so" expression on his face. Dr. Dane wrote down more notes while staring back at the marks. Finally, it was time to leave. Jaimie asked about his session but didn't get a response. John told her, "He needs time if he wants to tell you he will tell you." Jaimie seemed to understand, putting her arm around his shoulder as they walked out. Inside Dr. Eliza watched Jaimie's action. She and Dr. Dane chatted about Scott asking, "She said he changed, but do you think he could have?" He replied, "The level of abuse he went through would make any person snap. He found the right person to help him. She clearly cares about him despite their troubled past." Dr. Eliza told him, "Apparently that was no accident; that was shifty coordination by kids trying to help out a friend." Dr. Dane gave her a puzzled look but laughed and said, "Never underestimate the power of kids with a purpose." The next morning the students were heroes among their peers. However history class turned into a nightmare. Mr. Poland was confrontational and blunt with them. The other 16 students started to complain about his behavior earning them several warnings. The 10 friends tried their hardest to not get in trouble but he was doing his best to antagonize them. Listening outside the classroom Alice Rodriguez grew annoyed. Just before the end of class Alice entered and had a word with Mr. Poland. He gave her an angered look but was told, "You might be assigned to Ms. Vega's school but I'll be damned if you are going to get away with this behavior. If you don't stop your harassment you will be removed. Consider this your second warning, and you better hope their parents don't complain because you do not want them on your case. This wasn't 10 kids against you this time, this was all 26 and this was entirely your own doing." The class waited for him to say something but he ended the class without saying a word. Outside the parents were told what happened, Mr. Poland was now a heated topic among them. Dorothy Vega was made aware of the parents' anger and sat on acting. Mr. Poland had his short leash and his warnings. She didn't need to do anything yet, he'd determine the next move himself. John noticed her reaction, it wasn't like her to sit idly by while her students were facing trouble but realized what was really going on and asked, "Giving him slack to hang himself?" Dorothy nodded but added, "Some teachers shouldn't teach. We need more like you." John tried to hide a smile but she giggled at his response. The rest of the week went smoothly. Mr. Poland stopped antagonizing the kids and started teaching them again. Jessica and Scott asked Jaimie and Michael, "How can you two stand this after having your dad as a teacher? It's a million times worse!" The others asked, "Is he that good?" Scott proudly said, "He's the best. He made class fun." The others wanted to know more. They told about the fun times they had when he tutored them and how different Mr. Poland was. Mr. Poland didn't venture from the book, you could miss a class and if you read the book you wouldn't have missed anything. John, on the other hand, was all about topics and how they interact and if you missed a class you missed something important. He used a lot of graphs and charts and maps, Mr. Poland just used whatever the book gave them to use. The kids were disappointed at missing the fun. Jenna pointed out, "He did some of that last June when we were in Boston. I guess that's the closest we will get to having him as a teacher." Jaimie sensed their disappointment and said, "He's trying to become a high school teacher, maybe we will have him next year." The kids perked up about that idea even if it was possible he wouldn't have them in class. Friday night brought news that Greta and Quentin were coming the next morning. The kids were overjoyed at the news and prepared for the long day. Scott and Jessica packed up their clothes and items, feeling sad that they were leaving Leslie. She was happy for them, saying, "You need your family." They spent the night mostly in silence as they were sad to leave her behind. Leslie and John drove to the airport to meet Greta and Quentin. The kids were overjoyed when they finally came out, rushing to hug them. Greta asked, "Were they alright?" John jokingly said, "Apart from two revolutions they were fine." Greta asked, "Do I even want to know?" John smiled and said, "The kids have taken them in as their own to the point that they would rather be suspended than see them pushed around. And it's not just our 8, this is all 24 on their side." The kids told the whole story while Greta listened with a smile. Greta introduced her husband to Leslie. John asked, "Did you receive the job offer from the firm yet?" Quentin nodded and quickly shot back, "Did you arrange the promotion? I thought it was just a lateral transfer." John looked at him saying, "Promotion? I had nothing to do with that, all I asked was if they needed a new architect in the office since you would be moving to the city and gave them your contact information. Whatever else is entirely the firm's doing." Quentin smiled saying, "Apparently they were looking for a lead architect and your timing was perfect, the bosses saw my work and gave me the promotion. Your friend said they were looking for someone for the job and were just about to look outside the company when your call came through." John laughed, saying, "I apologize if this tosses out the plan, I know it was only supposed to be four months but I take it this may turn into a permanent situation." The kids looked up hoping it meant they were staying. Leslie and John drove the newcomers to their new house. John explained, "It's kind of old but has had some work done. It has four bedrooms, an attic, yard, and basement." Quentin looked at Greta who was staring at the buildings in the neighborhood. He asked, "How close are you and the other families?" John said, "My family and Stacy's are two blocks away, Jenna is four, Richard is five, and the other three families are on the other side of the city." Scott perked up at hearing her name. Quentin was puzzled and asked, "Who is Stacy?" Jessica quickly joked, "Scott's new girlfriend." Quentin looked at Greta who gave him a, "Not now" look. Quentin looked at the inside of the house closely. He saw a lot of things he liked about the house. Jessica and Scott claimed their bedrooms while Greta set aside one for Quentin. After a while, they asked Quentin if he liked the place. Quentin smiled saying, "It's perfect." John handed them the keys and said, "If you are going to make any changes Dan can handle the work." Scott looked concerned, Jessica pointed out, "That's Stacy's dad, he gave Scott some sort of warning." Quentin laughed saying, "That's a good father." Greta groaned at the joke while Scott winced. John told them about the welcoming party at his house the next day. The other parents wanted to meet them and insisted on the party. Jessica teased that Scott and Stacy were going to be the center of attention. Quentin looked at Scott who was ready to faint from embarrassment and asked, "If you are going to tease him about it then how come you didn't find a boyfriend yet?" Jessica rushed off in embarrassment, Greta trying hard to stifle her laughter. Scott was starting to feel sad about all of this adventure for the family. He quietly asked them, "Are you mad that you moved because of me?" Greta grabbed and hugged him saying, "Not if it means protecting you two. We can adjust to this place." Quentin added, "Don't worry about us, I got a nice promotion and if she wants to work your aunt shouldn't have trouble finding work with a bank. You two matter more than anything in the world." Scott hugged them and went to his new room to unpack. Sunday morning the family drove to the Finn house. They were met by a group of people who were happy to meet the newcomers with open arms. Quentin and Dan hit it off well, John watched his neighbor enjoy himself with someone, "In the business" and who raised the guy count to a manageable level. Melanie and Greta watched their kids closely, noting that their closeness. Greta asked, "Is she always like that with boys?" Melanie told her about the prior boys then said, "It's something he is doing when he looks at her, she can't get enough of his eyes." The kids weren't happy that they were still on diaper duty. Greta almost burst into laughter as the eight went inside with the twins. John told her they were punished but that was something worth seeing. The kids begged to be let out of it but John said, "Two more months." Chapter 18: Bonding March wasn't too bad of a month for the families. Mr. Poland backed off from being a jerk towards the students and John's own students were doing their best for him. Quentin and Dan collaborated on several side projects that saw them busy and enjoying themselves. Greta enjoyed being a stay at home mother and to keep her occupied and earn an income John hired her to oversee his investments. She had been employed at a bank in Newhall but this was a whole other world. Greta was a whiz at it, bringing in sizable amounts and earning a comfortable commission. She never bothered to find a, "real" job, she enjoyed helping John more. When John told her what most of the money was used for she put even more time and effort into the job, trying hard to get better returns. She was doing something she loved for people who needed help and for someone she cared about. The joint Jessie/Claire birthday bash this year saw the group again enjoying a solo party with Jessie's older brothers now banned. The girls didn't want anyone there who didn't want to be there and were happy to have it be just close friends than put up with a repeat of last year's antics. Claire's brothers weren't a problem, they just weren't able to attend due to college. They sent their regards and promised to make it up to her at some point. Will gave them matching necklaces which got him a big kiss. The others got them lesser presents with full knowledge that he was going to give the nice ones. Claire spent the rest of the party in her boyfriend's arms while the others gave them some space. During the party, Melanie went into labor. The kids were left unaware while the adults did their best to get Melanie out. Dan was uncharacteristically strong, John and he stayed behind while Valerie and Anne drove Melanie to the hospital. After the party, John, Dan, and their kids drove to meet Melanie, Anne, and Valerie. They were upset that they weren't told right away, with Stacy jumping to conclusions about the baby's health. John told them, "It was for your friends' sake, we didn't want to spoil the party. They deserve a nice one after last year." They couldn't argue with that logic. Inside the delivery room, Dan was pacing back and forth. Valerie was keeping Melanie calm, trying her hardest to get her focused. John couldn't see Melanie in pain and waited outside with the kids. Anne volunteered to watch the twins while Jenna helped, without much of a fight from her. The whole clan had to wait several hours, but by 10:30 PM a baby boy was born. Valerie asked what they were going to call him; Dan suggested John but Melanie said, "He will never let you do that. If it's anything but Dan Junior he will be furious." Dan laughed and said, "Fine, he's Daniel John Lopez, Junior." Melanie gave him to Valerie who refused saying, "Oh no, dad holds the baby second." Dan handed him back to Melanie then went outside to give the good news, "It's a boy, Daniel John Lopez, Junior." John, surprised and shocked, asked, "John?" Dan said, "They wouldn't let me name him John Daniel, something about already having a JD in the family." John saw right through the lie but was happy that the two considered naming the baby after him. Dan finally said, "It's my middle name; they wouldn't let me name him John so he's Daniel John, Jr." John hugged him and said, "Hope you enjoy sleeping during the day, but at least you have a crew to help with diapers." The kids groaned at the joke. Monday afternoon Melanie and the baby were released. The kids were unusually hyper on Monday which most of their teachers were proud of. Mr. Poland was cranky but kept his mouth shut, they weren't interfering with his lesson plan so he couldn't complain too loudly. The other kids wanted pictures as soon as the baby got home. They were told, "He will be here tomorrow if mom is up to it." After the fun of the new baby came the annoyance of late nights, crying, dirty diapers, and feeding. Stacy and Rebecca weren't happy, the novelty wore off fast. Scott and Jessica were put into service to help out, with Scott being kept under close watch by Dan. Melanie didn't even bother watching him, he was good with the baby and the baby seemed to like him and Stacy was always in a better mood around him. She was willing to risk some clandestine kissing for a happy daughter. Quentin and Scott spent a lot of time talking to one another at home. Scott had a knack for art and design which Quentin noticed from his doodles in his notebooks. Scott tried to hide his drawings, saying, "They aren't anything worth looking at." Quentin disagreed, showing how his work was exactly the same. Greta watched her husband with Scott and liked that he was making progress with him. Scott was starting to be a regular kid, he no longer cringed in fear at doing something wrong or disappointing them. Scott had the proper supportive male role model he needed, one who wasn't afraid to be affectionate and caring with him. Quentin now had the son he dreamed, even if he wasn't, "Blood" he was still a son to him. Greta was confused and concerned. She asked John what she should do about Scott; she didn't want to risk his father taking him back. Even with clear proof, she didn't trust that town to prevent his dad from regaining custody. John suggested she and Quentin just adopt him. He was family, she was the mother he needs, and Quentin is the father he deserves. Greta looked at him oddly, saying, "But he's my nephew, I can't do that to my sister." John asked, "What would you think she would want you to do? She'd want him to have a loving home with people who cared about him. You are his mother now, even if you didn't give birth to him." Greta asked, "Did you have this same conversation with Valerie?" John said, "Valerie and I talked about it but we weren't together yet then. Jaimie knew what I was doing and was happy to have a family. I couldn't risk the state taking her away and Jaimie being forced to be someone she isn't, even without Valerie I wanted what was best for Jaimie." Quentin came in and asked what they were talking about. Greta told him, he asked John, "Do you think we should?" John nodded, adding, "You are only getting a piece of paper saying he is your son, you four are already acting as if he was your son already." Quentin nodded and said, "Let's do this for him." John suggested that he and Quentin take the boys out for a camping trip while Greta gets the forms filed. Quentin asked, "Do you have any experience in the woods?" John told about his previous trip, Quentin added, "OK, I was a scout and have taken Greta and Jessica to the woods a few times." John let out a laugh and said, "Thanks a lot, now Dan has his excuse for not going!" Quentin apologized, but John laughed as he told him, "He went with us last year and had a miserable time; it was one thing he isn't good at." John asked the boys if they wanted another guy's weekend, the boys practically jumped for joy. Michael asked if they were going to the same place, John suggested something with cabins since it gave them more time. The boys liked the cabin idea, Richard asking, "Are you planning on tripping on ladders and falling down hills?" John scowled as the others laughed, Scott was told the story and tried not to laugh but failed. John shot back, "Guess we know who is cleaning up after meals." The boys piled into the van and tried to keep occupied. Quentin told them stories about his days as a scout with jokes about how bad they burned food and how badly bitten they were by bugs. The boys were laughing at the stories. Quentin kept them laughing for much of the ride. Michael asked if he was a worse scout than his dad, Quentin looked at John and said, "You didn't say you were one too." John tried to dodge the revelation but finally admitted, "I gave it up after four years, it wasn't what a city boy did and there wasn't much else for me to earn at camp." Quentin shook his head and said, "We were all about the fun, not the badges." John admitted, "You were lucky, I was pushed to get ahead so we didn't really enjoy it the same way you did. It got boring once you only had a couple of things left to earn." They arrived at the cabin and got settled. Out back there was a fire pit which the boys got firewood for. Scott stayed close to Quentin, helping him set the fire while John watched over the others. Scott and Quentin were getting along well, Will joked, "He's like his dad, he's like Mr. Finn is with Michael." The others agreed, asking John, "Is he going to be adopted?" John coyly said, "We'll see." That evening Quentin, John, and Scott had a private talk. Quentin asked Scott, "Your aunt and I had a serious talk about you yesterday. We don't want your dad to ever have a chance of getting you back and the only way to do that was by you becoming our son. Would you mind if your aunt and I adopted you as our own?" Scott looked in disbelief, asking, "Why would you do that?" Quentin said, "Because we love you and it'll be easier on you. We don't want to ever lose you. You are already a son to us we want to make it official. You deserve a chance to be rid of the fear of your dad." Scott looked at John who nodded in approval. Scott asked, "Isn't it wrong, you are my uncle and aunt." Quentin quietly said, "Your mom asked your aunt to look over you, even taking you in as our own. She wanted you to have a real family." Scott started to cry and said, "Yes, please." Quentin hugged Scott as John stepped back to give them a moment. The boys weren't fools. They listened closely and then jumped back when John moved. They high-fived when they heard Scott agree. Michael told John, "Did you plan that or did it happen?" John admitted, "This is what the trip was for; his mom is getting the paperwork filled out right now." They asked how long it would take, John, admitted, "I don't know, but it will happen. There are a lot of reasons why it needs to happen and none against it." The boys were active the next day. Hiking several miles to the top of a large hill then fishing in a pond for several hours. John again caught a turtle, the boys laughing at his misfortune until Will caught one as well. John shook his head saying, "They have a taste for hooks." Quentin chuckled as he heard the turtle story, which then followed by him pulling in a fish. The boys applauded while John conceded, "This is a first for me, someone actually caught something without a shell." Scott followed with a fish of his own, John joking shot, "Like father, like son" which brought a huge grin from Scott. The boys quickly took pictures before tossing the fish back. The boys congratulated him saying how lucky he is. The night was spent talking with the boys telling stories about the city to Scott. Michael told him about the summer cleaning crews that he was probably going to do. Scott asked why they would get stuck doing that; Michael reluctantly said, "It's the largest job with the most people. It's easy but hot work." Will unintentionally added, "And can be dangerous." The boys shushed him but Quentin wanted to know. John told about Jaimie's assault and the response afterward. Quentin didn't say anything, letting it drop. Some things were left not talked about. The drive home was quiet as the boys were exhausted. Scott was the only one with any energy but it was just nervous energy. Quentin told him not to worry he's going to be fine. John said, "It'll take a while but you aren't going anywhere. We will ensure that you stay put." Scott started to ease up. Chapter 19: Change of Plans While the boys were away on their weekend the girls went to visit Joseph and Evelyn. They enjoyed the large park near their condo and spent a few hours running around and watching the boats on the river. Later they were treated to a swim in the complex's pool, which the girls loved. Evelyn and Joseph were having a lot of fun with the girls, they both said, "This was a good idea" when thinking about their move to the new Finn hometown. Sure it was expensive but the investment was made up for in smiles and love from the kids, especially Jaimie's. About an hour into the swim one of their neighbors pulled Joseph aside and complained furiously about Jaimie. He knew what she was and he demanded that she leave. Angered that someone would be so stupid to accost him about his granddaughter Joseph asked him, "What exactly is she doing that offends you?" The man bluntly said, "That tranny freak has no right to be here. Get it out of here or I'll take it out." Joseph bottled his anger and told him, "And who the hell do you think you are to do that?" The man said, "I'm a resident, that thing isn't. Get it out or I'll take it out." Joseph lost his composure. He could only be pushed so far before he reacted. Joseph angrily told him, "And I am a resident as well. She is my granddaughter and my guest. You have no right to ask her to leave as she has done nothing wrong, violated no rules, and is here with not one but two residents. If you threaten her again or make any attempt to remove her you will regret it." The man looked at Joseph. He took a step towards Jaimie but was stopped by Joseph who grabbed his arm and flung him down to the floor. The man screamed, "I'm calling the police" Joseph bluntly said, "Do so. I'll explain what you tried to do and we will see who ends up in jail. I'll be sure to file a complaint regarding your actions; I can guarantee you won't see the inside of this pool again and I highly doubt you will be allowed to live here past the next month." Jessica and the girls listened closely to what was happening. She shamefully asked Jaimie, "Does this happen a lot?" Jaimie mumbled, "It does but not as often." Jessica hugged her saying, "I don't know how you can deal with this happening. You are stronger than any of us." The girls continued their swimming for another hour before calling it a night but the fun was over the second the man opened his mouth about Jaimie. Joseph tried to apologize to them but Jaimie kind said, "You can't stop people from making fools of themselves because of me." The others agreed with her, quietly nodding as she hugged her grandfather. The girls thanked Joseph and Evelyn, saying that was a better day than being out in the woods. Joseph asked why he wasn't asked, Jaimie said, "They must have something planned or wanted us to spend some time with you. Either way, you have to ask dad." Sunday afternoon the girls met up with the boys and exchanged stories. Jessica screamed in delight when Scott told her the news, the others hugged them while the boys watched. Jessica immediately asked, "How long will it take?" Scott and the others didn't know. Her mother came in and the group asked, "Did you sign the forms?" Greta looked at John and Quentin looking for an answer, Scott finally said, "They want to know about the adoption forms." Greta smiled and said, "Yes I did. I just need one more signature." Scott was handed the forms. He looked at them and read them over. He had tears welling up, he was so happy he had trouble signing his name. Jessica guided his hand and hugged him when he finished. She hugged him and called him, "Bro" which the others cheered. The group went outside to celebrate while the adults talked inside. Valerie inspected the forms twice to ensure they were in order then put them in an envelope. She said, "I'll drop these off at the court on Monday, this should take a while but hopefully before the school year ends he will be your son." Greta thanked her for helping; Valerie wouldn't accept thanks saying, "This is what friends do. I owe it to Tiffany to ensure Scott is happy. He deserves a second chance at a family. Every kid does." Quentin hugged his wife as she started to cry, John smiled as the two let the idea of him being their son sink in completely. John saw the kids looking bored and started to think it was time to end their punishment. He asked Greta and Quentin, "Do you think we should let them off the hook? It's been a month and they are going stir crazy at home." Quentin said, "They meant well, and they have been on their best behavior since." Greta asked, "What will they be allowed to do? John thought it over and said, "They are due for their dates, and it'll just be them plus two more. The other parents have to agree to it, though." John called the others. They agreed but it had to be overseen. John asked Gabby if Jessie wanted to go, thinking that it would be a good assurance that the kids didn't have too much fun. She liked the idea and had the other four parents know the plan. John walked over to Melanie's house and gave her the update which got Dan flustered. John said, "Do you think Rebecca will let her do anything with her sitting next to her?" Dan got a wicked smile which Melanie said, "If he keeps it up Stacy will start rebelling against him. I don't want to even think about what she will do when she gets older." John defended her saying, "Stacy isn't that kind of girl, she pushes back but she won't go too far." Melanie laughed saying, "That's the first time you have said anything against me. Don't make it a habit." Rebecca popped in and added, "He was due; you two are way too in sync." She asked John if she could bring a date. John looked at Melanie who was as surprised as him. She asked if Thomas could go, Melanie stifled her joy while John kept an eye out for Dan hoping he didn't hear his younger daughter's big step into adulthood. John and Greta went outside and asked the kids if they wanted to go to the movies with their dates. Jenna and Jessica looked upset but John said, "Your punishment is being lessened, but this is going to be a joint outing with the 6th graders. We will be watching you all so no funny business." Scott asked, "Who else is going?" John didn't know; it was a spur of the moment thing. Quentin said he'd go along too. Jessica asked, "Why dad?" Quentin smiled and said, "It's a new place with strange boys. I want to make sure they keep their hands to themselves." John laughed and said, "Quentin, that's the third time one of us has said that. It must be in the dad code somewhere." Quentin nodded saying, "It's in chapter 3, alongside the proper use of a baseball bat and where to bury a body. " All four boys gave him a scared look as John and Dan burst into laughter. The girls just rolled their eyes at the bad joke. Jessica asked Jaimie, "Why the movies?" Jaimie explained their usual dates with Jessica looking disappointed. Jessica meekly said, "The kids back home would go to the bowling alley or ice cream parlor instead of the movies." Jenna quickly blurted out, "Can we do that instead?" John and Quentin asked what was going on and Jenna said, "Jessica told us what they used to do, why can't we do the same. The movies are kind of lame for dates." The others voiced agreement with Jaimie saying, "She has a point, and you don't have to be by our sides the whole time and you can talk while watching us." Quentin asked, "Is there any place like that around here?" John nodded and showed him the place. The girls won out but the younger kids were still going with them. The dates were set for the upcoming Saturday. Jenna and Jessica would have to find boys but Jenna already had two lined up. Jessica was introduced to Eric and George who were quickly enamored with the new girl. Jenna seemed pleased that they hit it off, saying, "They are good guys; they just need a push every now and then. They fear Michael and Richard so there is no danger of them getting rough." Jessica blushed and thanked her, hoping she was right about them. In class, Mr. Poland started a build up to their big field trip. The kids would be going to Minuteman National Historic Park about 15 miles away. The kids were thrilled. Mr. Poland insisted that they have all work done before the trip. There was a major problem, the two new students did not have the work, therefore, would be barred from the trip. The kids tried to plead but Mr. Poland bluntly stated, "I put those rules in place years ago and never had a problem. It is not my fault you two showed up late into the year and partially into the unit. You can't go, end of story." The kids looked defeated but Scott and Jessica reassured them, "You shouldn't let him spoil your fun. We will be fine here. Principal Vega will have something for us to do." The rest of the week was spent in a slump. None of the kids were happy to leave two friends behind. They told their parents about what he said and were told, "It's his rules; we can't ask that he break them. It's not fair but it's his rules." The kids were disappointed and moped until their dates. John didn't want to complain about what was going on but he didn't like it. It was garbage, he was singling them out on purpose. On Friday the group met up outside the Finn house and loaded into the cars. Rebecca, Jessie and their friends along with Thomas were going with John while Dan and Quentin drove the other two groups. Dan wanted a night away from DJ while watching the girls closely, he didn't quite trust Scott and knew something was going on between Thomas and Rebecca. Before they left John quietly told him, "You have to let her make her own mistakes, and he is more afraid of us than you are of him." Rebecca asked, "Are you going to do that when I start actually dating?" John rolled his eyes as Dan proudly said, "Of course." The youngsters barely noticed how badly they were doing, enjoying the fun of the game. Rebecca and Thomas were oblivious to the looks the others gave them; they stayed close and talked freely while the girls giggled at them. John had a knowing smirk on his face the entire night watching them. There was a budding relationship there and neither could see it growing yet. It was friendship first and foremost, but there was more to it than that. Over in the other lanes, the girls were giving the boys a show by soundly beating them. Jessica and her date George were getting along great while Scott and Stacy were barely paying attention to the game. Michael and Courtney took a cue from the others and talked more than bowled, while Jaimie and Richard were content to sit close and watch. Claire and Will didn't even bother bowling; they just liked the gossip and fun. Dan was having a hard time containing his anxiety, Scott just sat there and didn't move his hands from his sides and always looked Stacy in the eyes. Quentin pointed out that the two were acting more like a married couple than teens which Dan nearly fainted over. Quentin smiled and said, "You are having a harder time with the kids maturing than anyone else, just give her some space and let her become the woman she is meant to be." Dan shook his head mumbling, "I don't want to lose my little girl." Quentin shot back, "She hasn't been little for a while if you hadn't already noticed; she's a young lady now and needs you to start treating her as such. Give her some space and let her blossom. Smother her and you will eventually cause her worse problems. She is in a relationship with someone she cares deeply about and who cares deeply about her if you don't give her some slack the two of them will be hurt. I may be your friend but I can't let Scott get hurt like that." Dan reluctantly agreed and waited in the car for them to come out, spending his time deep in thought while the kids finished their games. The kids noticed Dan had left and asked what was going on. Quentin smiled and said, "He was simply informed that his little girls were now young ladies and he needed to give them some breathing room. He is thinking and if I am right he will be back to normal soon. Expect some slack from now on." Stacy smiled in delight while the others went back to what they were doing. She walked over and thanked Quentin for the help. Quentin looked down and smiled saying, "Seeing your daughter grow up is the hardest part of being a dad. Your dad took longer than others to realize that. But he loves you which is important." Stacy hugged him and thanked him for the help. John noticed the exchange and told Rebecca, "I think your dad finally saw your sister as more than his little girl. That means you are going to be his little girl now." Rebecca groaned in frustration and asked, "When can I get up to young lady status? I don't want him smothering me like that!" John shook his head and laughed, the poor girl was in for a few years of undivided attention. The kids had a great time. They thanked Jessica for the idea and hoped to do other things soon. John and Quentin quickly said, "We will think about it." Jessica tried to give her father sad eyes only to be told, "Those won't work anymore, the second you showed maturity you lost the ability to use cuteness on me. It now only works on boys and grandparents." Jessica turned red while the others snickered. Back home the parents listened to events of the night. Dan was still silent but wasn't acting hostile or antagonistic towards Scott. Stacy sat next to him during the drive and hugged him when they arrived but he was still silent. Melanie asked what happened, Quentin told her and she smirked at him saying, "I think you broke him. He can't hate boys anymore and he can't see her as a little girl." Stacy bluntly said, "I haven't been a little girl for almost two years, and Rebecca won't be one for long. He needs to realize that because it'll be a long frustrating time for him otherwise." Melanie stifled another laugh saying, "Any doubt she is my daughter?" John was laughing as well, adding, "Never had a doubt." Valerie brought the twins came out to watch the departures and listened to Stacy. She couldn't help but smile at her outburst and John's and Melanie's replies. She sat with the twins on the porch and hugged Stacy saying, "You are more mature than people realize." Stacy started to cry and asked Valerie, "Why are they so afraid of me getting older?" Valerie comforted her while John and Melanie moved away for privacy. Valerie finally said, "They are dads and dads want to keep their daughters young and pure for as long as possible. Their worst fear is something happening to you or someone saying something about you. They love you and it clouds their minds. They know you are getting older and it scares them. Sometimes it takes another dad to set them straight, and that happened tonight. Just give him time and he will come around. He knows how you feel about Scott and he knows how Scott feels about you and he sees how you two act and it scares him that he might be the right one for you. Just let him have his space and let him come to you. Don't worry about it, just know they love you." Stacy cried again and hugged Valerie tight. The two were joined by Melanie who took over hugging her. John and Dan just watched the ladies doing their magic not saying anything in fear that it would ruin the moment. Chapter 20: Field Trip Confrontation Mr. Poland's patience with his class was wearing thin. The students were indignant towards him, openly complaining about his teaching. The worst offenders were the 10 friends. The other students followed their lead in everything, openly questioning their grades and complaining about their tests. All of this frustration was getting to him. He started to feel pains in his chest on Monday and by Tuesday he had to leave early. Dorothy Vega immediately looked for a substitute teacher but was unable to find one to cover the class. She was informed that Mr. Poland would need at least a day of rest and possibly a second, meaning she needed someone who was available and able to teach history. She had few options and none of them good. Alice Rodriguez gave her an odd suggestion, mentioning using one of the student teachers for the class. Dorothy asked, "If you are thinking of who I am thinking of this should be an interesting week." She immediately called the high school and told them about the situation and what they wanted to do, with a call immediately placed to one of the classrooms. John was observing the freshman geography class when it was interrupted by a phone call. Ms. Paula quickly answered it then motioned for John to pick up the phone. Instead of picking up where she left off she waited for John to finish the call. When John answered the call he was told, "Mr. Poland had had some health trouble and the middle school needs someone to cover for him. You are the only person free to cover." John asked for how long and was told, "Just today and tomorrow, possibly Thursday." John agreed but said he would call Dorothy Vega first. John immediately dialed her office and got the information. He asked about the field trip and was told, "You are going in his place." John blurted out, "I have never been there and have little information; I'll need a bit of time to get what I need together." Dorothy assured him, "The students know Mr. Poland's style and they won't miss anything. I can guarantee they know the homework before he even assigns it. Just do your thing and let me handle his complaints." John looked at the students in the class watching him and said, "I need you to get me two permission slips. Since I'm going in his place we are going by my rules and his arbitrary ban on Scott and Jessica ends. Those two have as much right to be there as any other student; they deserve to be there with their classmates." Try as he might he wasn't quiet and the geography class heard what he said. The students tried hard to fight back cheers. Ms. Paula wasn't going to bother to stop them, she was listening as well and had a smile on her face hearing what he said. John hung up and apologized for the interruption explaining, "Mr. Poland, one of the 8th-grade history teachers, has had a medical episode and the school needs a temporary substitute. Apparently, they agreed on my doing the temporary replacement so I won't be here tomorrow and possibly Thursday. My sincerest apologies to you Ms. Paula for the interruption to the class." Several students asked about the field trip, wanting to know what he meant by the ban. John was blunt and said, "He had a problem with two new students that started school here in February being assigned to his class and barred them from joining their classmates. That was his ban, not mine, so they are going to go too." The students cheered, saying, "He shouldn't be a teacher; he was nasty and only read from the textbook. They will love you tomorrow." John apologized for the interruption and excused himself as Ms. Paula restarted class. John called Greta to tell her about his plan. She would be at school and sign the forms, giving them to Dorothy to ensure it was on file. John then spent the next hour in the cafeteria planning his class presentation and gathering as much information as he could on the site. As the classes changed between periods students saw him working hard, talking in his presentation voice to nobody, and rewriting his script. Word got around what he was doing and why. A student teacher who stood up for kids and was willing to go directly against the regular teacher's rules was something that never happened. John was creating a legend for himself beyond the existing legend. John then made his way to the middle school stopping in Dorothy's office to pick up the forms and getting the itinerary for the next day. John then had a talk with the other history teacher, Mr. Taylor, while his students were doing a quiz. Mr. Taylor was pleased that John was the one going, saying, "Your reputation precedes you; some of the parents are already talking about having you as a teacher next year." John assured him, "It's premature; I have a lot of hours to do if my waiver is denied." He and John talked about the plan for the next day, with John telling him what he was going to say to his students. John was surprised when he asked if he could do it for both classes before they left, saying, "That's pure gold, the kids need that kind of perspective for this kind of place." John agreed, hoping that Mr. Poland wouldn't find out about this collaboration lest Mr. Taylor have to put up with his attitude. The time finally came and Dorothy escorted John to the class. He waited a few minutes while the classes changed keeping out of sight of the kids. He heard Dorothy give them the bad news about Mr. Poland. Miles Arnold timidly, asked, "Does this mean the field trip is canceled?" Dorothy used this as a way to get John in, saying, "No, it means we had to find a replacement for him. We spent all morning finding one but it should have taken only a few seconds. You can come in now" to which John entered the classroom. The class immediately fell silent as the kids grasped what was happening. John jokingly said, "I guess I should take that as a disappointment that Mr. Poland isn't taking you tomorrow. Oh well, I guess I'll just have to go alone." The kids burst into laughter and John told them what the plan was. He looked at Scott and Jessica who were extremely sad and said, "I have something else to say. Scott, Jessica I believe these are yours." He handed them the permission slips and watched their faces light up. He explained, "Mr. Poland was unfair and unjust in preventing you two from going tomorrow. I'm not Mr. Poland so have Greta fill these out and hand them to Principal Vega right away." The class started cheering as John got down to work. He spent the rest of class talking about the location and the importance of it. The kids were listening closely as he showed maps, images, and animations. He was the polar opposite of Mr. Poland and the kids were hooked. There were smiles on all faces by the time the bell rang ending the day. Outside the kids excitedly told their parents what happened. Several looked at John in disbelief, asking, "Did you really do that?" John admitted, "It wasn't my best work but I only had 90 minutes to get the presentation together." More parents were asking about Mr. Poland and John with several asking if he was going to take over for the rest of the year. John admitted, "I am only here for the field trip; I'm only here because they couldn't find someone better to cover on such short notice." There were several disappointed replies with John saying, "Mr. Poland will be back, I only hope the kids enjoy themselves tomorrow despite his impending return." John immediately found Greta who signed the slips. He handed them over to Dorothy and told her, "If he has a problem have him go to me, if he tries to take it out on the students I'm getting involved and it won't be pretty. These kids are not going to be pushed around by him anymore." Dorothy assured him, "If he has a problem with it then he has to justify why, and his excuse won't hold up under any scrutiny. I can guarantee you that you have made more allies in one class period here than he will ever have so don't worry. You are going to be fine." John wasn't so sure. Mr. Poland can hold a grudge for a while and had 26 people to take it out on just to spite John. The next morning the kids were up early and prepared for the day. John drove to the school early and arranged for the two classes to meet up in the gym before they left. He and Mr. Taylor would bring the classes down and listen to John's quick lecture before boarding the buses. Mr. Taylor's class was a bit put off by having to wait to leave but once John began they listened closely. Zeke Williams stepped out of his office to watch the lecture as well. It was rare for anyone to be in the gym in between gym classes and he had to see what was going on. He watched the kids' faces turn from boredom to actual intrigue as John spoke. 50 kids listened to his every word, it was something he had never seen before. When John was done both classes applauded then boarded the bus with Mr. Taylor saying, "These kids have never paid attention to anything like that before, you might just have made them interested in today." John was humbled by the compliment saying, "As long as it gets them interested in history." The bus ride was an event in of itself. The students were interested in John and bugged him for stories about the school. Jaimie and Michael told as many as they could with Stacy adding a few that she had heard. John could only blush and nod when asked if they were true. Mr. Taylor listened quietly trying to stifle laughter as the kids had their way with the new teacher who was enjoying the grilling as much as them. It was a perfect distraction for the kids. Eventually one of the students asked about John's trip when he was in school, John blanched and didn't answer. Stacy told them the truth, "Uncle John was in special classes in school. They were kept apart from other students and when they started to integrate them into the regular classes they didn't allow them to join the trip. They spent their time in the principal's office or on the old bench while everyone else was having fun." The students gave him sympathetic looks and stopped asking questions. Miles eventually asked, "Is that why you let Scott and Jessica come on the trip?" John said, "Yes. It was partly the reason. I didn't want them to experience that, it isn't right. You kids should be given every opportunity to learn, a school shouldn't be so rigid that you can't bend the rules to allow for some flexibility or changes to be made when there is a need for some flexibility." Eric asked, "Are you going to teach next year?" John shook his head and said, "I am not sure; I don't believe I will be. I might have to wait another year and could have to find a job in another city." The kids let out a collective disappointed, "That stinks." The students sat in silence for the rest of the trip. Off the bus, the students merged into one mass as they were shown around the park. The students listened closely to the guides, hearing stories and adding to what John told them before. They followed the guides around to the various spots and paid close attention to the details. Mr. Taylor whispered to John, "These kids are hanging on their every word; you did a number on them at school." John whispered back, "They want to hear the other half of the story." Mr. Taylor nodded in agreement; John set them up nicely for this eagerness. After a lunch and a short ride to another location in the park, the kids listened to more stories and lectures. The kids didn't lose interest, hanging on every word and enjoying it. As they were getting ready to leave the students asked if John was paying attention as well, John said, "Of course, it was my first time here as well so it's new information. And even if it wasn't different people have different perspectives on the same events." Mr. Taylor asked what he meant, one of John's students let him know, "Mr. Finn never went on the 8th-grade field trip." Mr. Taylor looked at John and laughed, saying, "This is a first, students and teacher getting an education on a field trip!" The kids laughed while John blushed. Back at school, John gave the students one last assignment saying, "You don't have to do this but I would like for you to do it." The students looked at him oddly and wrote down the assignment. Outside the kids retold the day's events to their parents and again John was peppered with questions. John tried his hardest to answer them but mostly said, "I don't know." The kids were overly happy about John, with several parents dreading Mr. Poland's return the next day. John got a phone call early that said Mr. Poland would be out and asked that he cover his classes. John regretfully agreed. The students were overjoyed when John came into the room with Jaimie and friends smiling broadly. John asked, "Did you do what I asked you to do?" and to his surprise, all of the students handed him papers. Miles proudly said, "We were going to hand them to Jaimie and Michael to give to you but I guess that won't happen." John smiled and said, "Thank you, this means a lot." John was halfway through his lecture when Mr. Poland entered the room. He looked at John and scowled saying, "They should have told you I was coming in." John apologized to him and gathered his items. Mr. Poland saw the stack of papers and asked, "What are those?" John explained to which Mr. Poland demanded that he leave them for him to read. John protested, saying, "You have no basis to grade these; these were done solely for my own records." Mr. Poland bluntly said, "These are my students and I'll read whatever work they produce." John gave him the papers but said, "I expect these after class tomorrow untouched and ungraded and I'll be informing Principal Vega what you are doing. If you don't produce them I'll be filing a complaint with the union and I can guarantee you won't like having them involved." Mr. Poland sneered at him and said, "These kids didn't even do their work! What did they do Tuesday? Where are their notes?" John explained what they did; only making Mr. Poland angrier. Mr. Poland started shouting at John, "You ruined my lesson plan! Now they are two days behind and I have to double their work just to make it up!" John was getting angered himself; Mr. Poland got up close to him and in his face said, "Whoever told you to do whatever you wanted is an idiot. I run my classes the way I want and I demand it to continue to run that way even if I am out. These kids now have to do extra work because of you." John boldly said, "Kids, what was your homework the last two nights?" Jaimie gave him the correct pages for both nights. John asked, "And what did I assign you to do the past two nights?" Michael gave the correct homework that Mr. Poland was going to assign. John bluntly said, "This so-called 'idiot' who told me to deviate from your lesson plan and teach how I saw fit is the principal. Please, by all means, tell her how I ruined your class when she knew approved everything I did and with a joint agreement with Mr. Taylor we implemented the change to best serve the students." The students let out a collective laugh. Mr. Poland tried to backtrack. John took a step back and bluntly said, "These kids knew exactly what their assignments were and did them exactly as you would have assigned. They aren't behind, they are in fact ahead. What they did in class was what I assigned as I was the one doing the teaching. I got clearance to do this direct from the principal and did so with her full support. She knows exactly how I teach and specifically had me replace you on the field trip so the students got a better experience. If you have a problem with that then find a new line of work because you are not a teacher, you are just a bully with a book." Cheers rose around the room and from outside. Mr. Poland's screaming caught the attention of several teachers and they stopped to listen to his outburst. John gathered his last items and headed for the door. Before leaving he added, "And for your information, the two students that you barred from the field trip went with us. If I ever hear that you are purposely barring a student from participating in an activity I will ensure that you are not only fired but prevented from teaching ever again. You can claim it is your right to do so but it isn't. You don't have the right to harass students or deprive them of an education. I have known them for two and a half years and those two are two of the best students you have, if you can't see that then you have no business teaching." The kids cheered again. John apologized to the teachers and students listening to the argument. He walked to Dorothy's office and offered her his apologies for causing a disturbance as well as for the incoming complaints from students, teachers, and parents. Dorothy asked what it was all about then was told by one of the other teachers, "Mr. Poland had a coronary over Mr. Finn's teaching. He took issue with him diverging from his lesson plan, teaching about the field trip, assigning a paper as homework, and letting the two students go on the field trip." Dorothy grew angry and excused herself. She ran up the stairs to the 8th-grade floor and walked into Mr. Poland's room. Without bothering to wait for him she bluntly said, "Mr. Poland, gather your things and leave. You stepped over the line today and need to leave." Mr. Poland started arguing but Dorothy cut him off saying, "You have verbally abused your students. You have shown extreme bias against several. You have refused to allow two of them to attend a required field trip without reason. You have just verbally sparred with a fellow teacher over an authorized change in lesson plans and you disrupted not just this class but four others." Mr. Poland tried to plead and explain saying, "He's just a student teacher!" Dorothy didn't buy that excuse saying, "Key word there is 'teacher'. He made changes with my full consent and despite not having to do so he assigned the exact work that you would have assigned so you have no excuse for your behavior. Please leave." The students were silent. They didn't want to move or say anything to make the situation worse. Mr. Poland bluntly said, "I'm taking this to the union." Dorothy quietly replied, "Good luck, you will need it." Mr. Poland left the room and laughter and cheers could be heard from other rooms. Dorothy turned to the students and apologized for the inconvenience saying, "Mr. Finn is a great teacher and did not deserve that. We will try to find you a replacement for the rest of the year." One of the students asked, "Why can't Mr. Finn do it.?" Dorothy shook her head and said, "He is still a student teacher so there are rules about what they can and can't do. As much as I'd love to have him take over it isn't possible just yet. I don't believe Mr. Poland is done with the school yet so please when he comes back try not to cause him any more trouble. I can only protect you for so long, with nothing left to lose anymore next time he may physically harm one of you." The kids asked about Mr. Poland, asking was he really gone. Dorothy was honest and said, "As much as we all want him to be gone Mr. Poland will be back next week to teach your class but it will be under strong scrutiny. He has now done something worse in that he has broken union rules and will no longer get their help. Anything he does out of line will cost him his job. But that said he has nothing left to lose so he may do something drastic that harms you. Please don't push him, the man will make his own mistakes on his own so please don't push him. He may go after one of you and I don't want him to hurt you." The class was disappointed. Dorothy stayed with them until the bell rang and released them. John was outside waiting when the kids mobbed him. John tried to get away but they were holding him tight. The parents watched as the students showed their affection for their substitute, with other students looking on puzzled and surprised. John managed to get away but walked right into Mr. Poland. The teacher grew angrier than he had been before, shouting vulgarities and obscenities at John. John repeatedly asked that he stop. Mr. Poland shouted, "Who the hell do you think you are to barge into my classroom and upset my class with your antics?" John calmly replied, "I'm a teacher, that's what. The students weren't being taught what they were about to see so I taught them. They weren't being told the whole story so I filled in the gaps. They actually listened and learned from their trip. I am sorry if this offends you but it is the honest truth. These kids were LEARNING not just listening." Mr. Poland was outraged further, telling John, "You aren't a teacher, you are a sham artist. You have no idea what these children need to learn or what they know. I have done this job for a decade and nothing changes it's the same information year in and out." John bluntly said, "Year in and out? So you have not once changed what you teach or how you teach? It's no wonder that the children hate your class, you don't even try to teach them. You read them facts and figures out of a book but they aren't learning anything new, they are rehearing stuff they heard already. From you, they aren't getting new information. A lot has changed in the last decade and you have failed to acknowledge or utilize the most basic tools that the school provides to you free of charge- a computer, a simple presentation program, and even a search engine. All of these are basic tools that turn a simple class into a whole other experience for these kids. I may just be a student teacher but I tried to find new ways of presenting things so they could understand, I am trying to get them to learn not just memorize. I am trying to actually TEACH them." Mr. Poland tried to say something but John walked off in clear disgust. The crowd was laughing at Mr. Poland and cheering John. Parents of other students were scowling at him for his attitude and within seconds Principal Vega asked him to leave school grounds. Mr. Poland was now a pariah in the school thanks to his own doing. Chapter 21: New Teacher John's confrontation with Mr. Poland made the rounds of all the schools. Mr. Poland was able to get the union to force the school to allow him to continue teaching for the rest of the year, much to the dismay of parents and students. The victory was hollow, though. A vigorous defense of John by both Zeke Williams and Mr. Taylor was the final straw, two major figures in the union had gone out of their way to help a student teacher against Mr. Poland carried a lot of weight. That wasn't even counting Mr. Leeds and Mrs. Paula who were two of the union's elected officers. They were adamant that should any action be taken against John all teachers in both schools would ouster the rest of the union hierarchy. It was their choice, Poland or Finn. The lines were drawn. After a short deliberation by the union board, Mr. Poland was bluntly told that the union has pulled all support for him and he was on his own, just as Dorothy expected. They were also recommending should another school system hire him should he be fired their union must stay clear of him. He was essentially finishing out the year without help or a job and without any more lifelines. In school itself, Mr. Poland was on an extremely short leash, any outbursts or screw ups and he was immediately terminated. Both principals were watching him closely, both were in equal agreement with any action taken against him. Every teacher in the school was listening to him in the breakroom and every parent was listening to him before and after school. There was nothing that he said that would not go unheard by anyone. Friday afternoon at the high school John's government student gave him a fake boxing belt in honor of his bout with Mr. Poland. John refused to accept it on grounds of it being inflammatory but appreciated the symbolism. In the teacher's lounge Ms. Paula, in particular, wanted to know how he managed to keep so calm, John looked around and said, "I can think of 26 reasons why I did but their egos are already inflated. I'll just say that after years of dealing with my niece and nephew you learn to keep your calm and bide your time until you can answer without losing your cool." Jake Bollinger asked John about his teaching hours. John wasn't sure but told him, "I only have a few hours left to work this year but I am a few dozen short overall. I am going to have to find a practicum placement for next fall." John was checking his mail and email daily for updates but so far hadn't received his reply. He was growing concerned, admitting to Jake, "I am going to lose my waiver appeal. I should have received word by now. It's been over six months, the board had to have decided already. Even Dean Zane couldn't pull off a magic trick with all of his support on his side." Jake saw the concern on him and reassured him, "You will always have a place here." John wasn't comforted, though. His dream was slipping away right before his eyes. A week after the Mr. Poland fiasco Scott received visitors. A social worker from the state was assigned to his case and another was sent to evaluate Greta and Quentin for the adoption. The two were collaborating so anything that was said or done would be known to the other. Scott was scared of what was happening and was on edge. Despite the social worker's assurances he wouldn't calm down and was barely able to speak. It took Stacy's timely arrival with Jessica to calm his nerves, something that both social workers noted. Greta and Quentin were interviewed about the living arrangements. They were quizzed on Scott's activities and his friendships. The duo was open and honest, telling everything they knew and not leaving anything out. The subject of Scott's therapy was brought up. Scott wouldn't talk about it, Quentin and Greta didn't know much about what went on as John had taken him to the sessions. Quentin was asked about his employment and how he obtained the house. Growing suspicious that there might be something going on Quentin stated, "I bought the house from its previous owner, a man whom we have grown to see as family. He is of impeccable credentials with good standing within this community. If you are insinuating anything I am going to ask you to stop and leave because if you try further I may not be able to contain my anger about what you are trying to do." Quentin's threats were not taken lightly. He was on the phone with Valerie as soon as he stopped talking. Within minutes Anne was at the door and introducing herself to her fellow social workers and inquiring as to why they were investigating John Finn when they were supposed to be there to investigate Scott's well-being and living situation. Anne's tone was serious. The two asked, "Are you threatening us?" Anne simply stated, "No, I am asking why you are not doing the job to which I know you were assigned. I'll be reading your report as soon as it is filed and if I find that you were here for any reason other than what you claimed you will find yourselves in court for harassment and slander. You have come into this house under false pretenses and are openly investigating someone whom you have no business investigating using an unrelated closed criminal abuse case as your basis to investigate. This is not only harassment it is an abuse of power and I guarantee you will lose when this is brought to court. I will also guarantee that you two are fired with reprimands placed in your employment files preventing you from employment elsewhere." The two tried again to ask about John and Anne finally said enough. "Don't think for a second I don't know exactly why you were here, you are after John Finn for the outright embarrassment last November. He has a black mark to his name, one that WE will see that is removed or I will personally see to it that he and his wife file suit against the department and you two. He was been proven vindicated beyond a shadow of doubt and the claims were proven to be fabricated so again I ask unless you want to face a lawsuit leave immediately." The two left but said that they would be back to remove Scott. They tried the next day to have Scott removed. Scott was not at home as he was out with Richard and his parents for some "get to know you" fun. Richard's parents were glad to spend some time with Scott, he was a pleasant boy who Richard was learning to emulate and helping Scott was just a side benefit. The two social workers tried to have Quentin and Greta arrested for obstructing their "investigation" but the two officers alongside them all but laughed in their faces. Greta and Quentin knew the officers through mutual acquaintances, they knew what was really going on and refused to assist knowing they would themselves be facing trouble. They didn't outright refuse to help the social workers, they simply stalled while Anne did her magic. Anne tipped off the Finns. Valerie, Joseph, and Evelyn expected their action and were there in court to fight the removal before the ink was dried. Anne was alongside them in court showing the paperwork for the case they were claiming to be at the home for and how it is unrelated to the questioning that they were asking. The Johnsons showed every piece of evidence they had to the judge who was on the verge of laughter at the blatant abuse of resources in the name of justice. He not only had Scott's situation cleared up but had an injunction put in place to prevent social services from investigating John without going before a judge to show cause. Scott's path was cleared wide open for adoption. With the situation forcibly cleared up, the judge asked Valerie how did she know this was going down. Valerie proudly stated, "Quentin, Scott's new father, called our friend Anne. Anne is a social worker for the agency. She was the one who was supposed to be assigned Scott's case but due to conflict of interest, she passed it on to the Boston office. When the questions started to veer off track from a simple inspection to inquiring about my husband she was called immediately. They didn't know they were talking to a colleague, they thought they were talking with their lawyer." A few days after the Scott fiasco Michael's birthday came up and he made the same request he made the year before, a weekend with his dad. John decided it was time for a family weekend and booked a cabin for them and the Johnsons. Michael was fine with this; it was still time away from the city with people he loved. Joseph proved to be a nature lover and enjoyed the trip more than expected. Michael and he went for long walks alone while John and Jaimie fished and watched the animals at the pond. Evelyn and Valerie simply relaxed, not really venturing out beyond the cabin due to the twins. They enjoyed watching John struggle with fishing, teasing him as he fought yet another turtle. Jaimie tried her hardest but got the same results as John, with Michael telling her, "It's not a surprise, you know 'like father, like daughter'." Jaimie wasn't amused but the others couldn't contain their laughter. The next week was another parent/teachers conference and was the last one before the end of the year. John was stuck at the high school and with Valerie having to stay with the kids Joseph and Evelyn went on their behalf. Joseph was pleased with all of the reports, getting glowing reviews and praise for Michael and Jaimie. Each said they were model students who take after their father's shining example. The only problem for the kids was history with Mr. Poland. He openly sneered at the two as they entered. He made a major mistake right off the bat since Jaimie entered on their own he didn't know who they were there with. He saw Joseph enter and was talking with Richard and Will so he assumed Joseph was their grandfather. Mr. Poland then stared at Jaimie and made snide, insulting remarks about her and Michael. He went too far in saying, "That kid has been nothing but trouble since she first came here, she has gotten one teacher fired and made several all but stop talking to one another. She should have been banned from the school before she set foot in here." Joseph asked him, "Could you repeat that I want to record this." Mr. Poland stupidly did so and Joseph told him bluntly, "I don't know who you mistook me for but you just berated my granddaughter. I can see why all the other teachers refuse to have anything to do with you; you are a horrible person and I know for a fact that you are about to be fired immediately." Mr. Poland realized he blew it and tried to reason with him but Joseph bluntly said, "Best not to respond, because anything further will be used against you. I don't know how much longer I can hold back my outrage and I really don't want to end up hurting you." He kept pleading as Joseph and everyone else in the room left in disgust. Joseph signaled to Dorothy, playing the recording for her. She immediately became furious and stormed out. Several minutes later Mr. Poland was escorted out of the school by the school's police officer with his personal items and a scowl on his face. Dorothy abruptly stated, "You were warned. Don't blame anyone else, blame yourself for once. Of all the times to badmouth a student you choose the one night that you have to face every one of their parents." Joseph was stoic and didn't say anything. Jaimie shook her head in disappointment, saying to her grandfather, "This will be bad." Dorothy assured her saying, "It will be fine, we have someone lined up already to take over." Jaimie asked who, but Dorothy was quiet about it. She hid a knowing smile, things went all according to plan. John was having a great night with his colleagues until the news that Mr. Poland was finally fired reached the high school. The reason why struck hard for John, his fellow teachers were as outraged as the parents but John was saddened, he knew Jaimie was going to be distraught. Jake asked what the trouble was; John mournfully said, "Jaimie is going to blame herself. Even if she didn't do anything she will still blame herself." Jake assured him, "She is a good person; she just needs reassurance that it wasn't her fault. Just be there for her." Jake received a phone call just as he finished with John. He looked down at him and gave a big smirk. Jake told him, "You finished with your required hours for the year right?" John nodded, saying, "I finished last week I am back to observing for the rest of the semester." Jake smiled and said, "Then you have no reason to say no to this." Jake told him what he needed him for. John looked stunned as others watched with big grins. John quietly asked, "How can I if I'm not licensed? I'd need a mentor to oversee." Jake smiled and said, "No, you actually don't. Dorothy approves the lesson plans and as for your mentor, you simply collaborate with your fellow teacher. Apparently, he is eager to assist, in fact, he had the whole emergency 'Poland gets fired' plan ready to go. You may be going for secondary education but you know that the license also covers 8th grade, so despite what it seems this is actually a big help for you." John was still stunned but thanked him for the assist. The other teachers slapped his back in congratulations and offered him luck with the kids. At home, Valerie asked Jaimie about Mr. Poland. The kids were sad that they were losing a teacher but hoped the new substitute was fairer towards them. Valerie looked at John who tried to keep his secret from them. She raised an eyebrow but he didn't give anything away. He didn't have to, she could tell just by his attempts to change the subject that something was going on. The next morning the school was abuzz with the news about Mr. Poland. John purposely waited until the kids were inside before making his way to his classroom. The homeroom kids were shocked that there was a new teacher and when told the circumstances started to applaud. John settled them down and started class anew. He asked that they keep the secret of him being the teacher quiet as long as possible as he wanted to surprise the last class of the day. They knew the reason why and agreed. The kids kept their word and by the last period, the kids filed into class only to see Mr. Finn standing by the whiteboard. The kids let a collective gasp in shock. With a big smile, he proudly said, "Guess you guys got your wish." After a few seconds to let them settle down he started his lesson. The kids were all ears and paid close attention, asking questions where needed and jotting down notes. Outside the parents heard the news and were genuinely happy. The kids were pleased with their teacher and were eager to please him. Mr. Taylor watched the kids leave and asked, "I take it they really liked their substitute." John nodded saying, "They took notes, participated in discussions, asked questions. They did everything I could have hoped for and more." Mr. Taylor shook his head with a smile and said, "My students are going to be jealous but it's worth getting rid of that troll. Just don't try too hard to outdo me, it'll be hard living up to a legend." John spent the rest of the week adapting a lot of things to their curriculum. Dorothy watched from outside the door and noted the students were actively participating and paying close attention. This wasn't the same class that she had seen the week before, this was a whole new reaction from the kids. A few parents started to ask about John, demanding to know why an unqualified teacher was teaching. Dorothy was quick to defend John, citing his track record with students and the need for a specialized teacher for the subject. She proudly showed them the results he was getting and bluntly stated, "Student teacher or not he has our full support." The kids spent the next week enjoying John's new style but weren't happy that he assigned them work to do over vacation. It was a simple assignment but one meant to get them thinking about their recent discussions. At home, Jaimie and Michael complained but John laughed it off saying, "You had harder assignments over vacation before, plus you need something to do on the plane." Michael and Jaimie asked what he meant. John smiled and told them, "Oh yeah I forgot to mention we are flying down to Miami to spend the week." They asked the real reason for the trip; John said two words, "Miguel Toro." Michael asked if they were going to the stadium, John nodded and said, "Jaimie's going too, he wants to meet her." Jaimie was scared of what he would say, John, assured her, "He knows about you and has wanted to meet you for a while. He wants your views on something." Jaimie eased up but was still guarded. Michael proudly told her, "He really does want to meet you." The kids told their friends about the trip. The girls were jealous they were going to the beach while the boys were jealous they were going to the stadium. Scott asked about the meeting, Michael told him the story about the game and showed him the ball from the Royals. Scott asked, "Are you going to be a Boston fan?" Michael nodded, Scott proudly said, "Then I'm joining you. No more Kansas City, I don't want to even think of that place anymore." Greta and Quentin heard him say that and asked John, "Do you think that's hasty?" John said, "No, it's nothing but pain and frustration for them. They want to move on and this is a way they can." Greta was pleased with the maturity Scott showed and proud that he was doing this on his own. When Friday came the family piled into the minivan for the trip to the airport. Their friends saw them off but had sad and jealous looks. The plane trip was pretty boring for the kids as they worked on their homework. John wasn't so lucky, he had work to do including planning the next two weeks of class while trying to finish up his last few papers for school. Graduation was fast approaching and John had several papers still to finish writing. Thankfully for John, the twins were quiet. Cat was sitting comfortable in her brother's lap while JD was with his mother. Michael complained but Cat wouldn't let him go and John needed him to hold her so he could work. Cat and he rarely got along, Valerie told him, "She really wants you, you can't give her to someone else or she will go back to annoying you." Michael grumbled but held onto her. Chapter 22: Miami Fun The family arrived and went right to their hotel. John laid out the plans for the week with Michael getting his sports kick from a Heat game while Valerie and Jaimie got their beach visit. John would later make them visit Key West and the Everglades so it would give the kids some educational stops. Saturday and Sunday were beach days. John nearly fainted seeing Valerie wearing a bikini, he muttered, "Beautiful, simply beautiful" over and over again while she strutted for him. Michael and Jaimie were getting visibly sick at their parents' affections, Jaimie saying, "Get a room you two!" John shot back, "Last time we did we ended up with your brother and sister." The two groaned in disgust while Valerie snickered at John's joke. Michael had enough and said, "Let's get a move on already!" Michael had a hard time concentrating on enjoying the beach with so many women wearing so little. Jaimie teased him mercilessly about this. Jaimie almost drooled seeing several guys in skimpy Speedos with Michael getting his payback teasing her about her drooling. John and Valerie were trying their hardest not to laugh while keeping the twins occupied. Jaimie noticed they were the only family on the beach, and said, "We must be the only family to come to the beach here; everyone else is either too old or trying to attract mates." Valerie laughed and said, "Too true, it's more a singles' destination." Monday was John's meeting with the Marlins. Michael had a migraine headache so he couldn't attend and JD was running a slight fever as well. Valerie asked that John take Cat with him while she stayed with the boys, Jaimie complained that it was no place for a baby but John agreed. The trip to the ballpark was quick and Cat was well behaved for once, giving Jaimie a lot of unwanted attention. John was met at the office by the two officials he met the previous summer. He was shown into a conference room and asked to wait while Miguel and a few others joined them. John used the time to try to work on his classwork while Jaimie kept Cat occupied. Jaimie saw this as an opportunity to ask John, "Can I wear a bikini at the beach? Everyone here is wearing them and I feel out of place." Not even looking up from his papers John shot back a quick, "No." Jaimie tried to plead with him giving him whatever excuse she could come up with even saying, "Hannah wore one when she was my age." John shot back a quick, "No she didn't, she wore a two piece tankini just like you. She didn't wear one until last summer, and only with her mother's approval." Jaimie tried to plead, giving John her puppy dog begging eyes but John said, "My decision is final." Miguel and the others came into the room as Jaimie moped silently. Miguel asked what the matter with her was; John sternly said, "She is mad because I wouldn't let her wear a bikini to the beach. She hates when she doesn't get her way." Miguel looked at Jaimie and smiled saying, "I don't blame you, too many men looking for cute ladies like her." Jaimie blushed as John introduced him to her. Miguel and the team officials got down to business. Miguel outlined his plans and asked for John's opinion of them. John looked them over for several minutes making notes and rereading certain parts. John told them, "It's a sound plan. It might work if you have people who are able to communicate well with kids." He showed Jaimie the plans and waited for her recommendations. Jaimie looked at John's notes and agreed, adding, "They need to be open to adapting, if they aren't there is going to be a problem." Miguel asked what she meant to which she told about Mr. Poland's inflexibility. John added, "He was an extreme case; you will find more open-minded teachers than close-minded ones." Jaimie added, "Keep it informal as possible if it feels like school the kids won't take to it." Miguel was impressed with Jaimie's honesty, asking her, "Is this how your dad taught?" Jaimie looked at him and said, "He has his own style, what you do will be different. The most important thing is to be flexible and get people who are open to changing how things work." Miguel nodded in appreciation. The officials thanked them for their time and would make changes leaving Miguel and John to talk. Before they left they asked, "Is this the girl who got the Royals owner banned by the league?" John was dumbfounded. Mr. Tegan's actions must have gotten noticed by some higher-ups to get a ban. John simply said, "I don't know, can you elaborate?" The officials were blunt and to the point, "One of the owners of the Royals accosted a young girl in a luxury box. She was visibly distraught and her grandfather had strong words with him as they left. The other owners witnessed the whole incident as well as the commissioner. The owner was pulled aside and told bluntly that his actions were in violation of multiple morals clauses and borderline criminal, and he either had to sell his stake or face banishment. He tried to fight back in court but with dozens of witnesses, he lost. All his shares were seized and he was given the same amount of money he purchased the shares for." John listened intently. Jaimie had a smile on her face, she was glad that he got what he had coming to him. John shook his head and said, "I would rather not say if she is or not." Miguel strongly suggested they drop their inquiry. The officials caught on and let it go, they did not want to face the same problems Tegan faced. When they left Miguel and Jaimie hit it off fast. Miguel was asking all about Winnisimmet and the kids. Jaimie started to open up to him joking with him and telling him about John and his adventures. Miguel asked, "How did you end up as a teacher when you aren't even done with school?" John told him the story with Miguel trying his hardest not to laugh at the sheer stupidity of Mr. Poland. Jaimie started to get curious and asked, "Why the interest in me? I'm just a kid." Miguel confessed, "My niece Reyna is like you. She is trying to transition to be a girl but is having a few problems at school. When your dad visited with your brother last year it opened up a lot of doors to understanding her. She heard the stories about the little boy who was becoming a girl out in Kansas City who stood up for herself and unintentionally brought down a whole town." Miguel showed a picture of Reyna Toro, Jaimie softly said, "She's beautiful." Miguel shed a tear and smiled, saying, "That's the nicest thing someone has said about her." Jaimie proudly said, "It's the truth. If people can't see that they are blind." Miguel hugged her saying, "I'll let her know you said that, she will love it especially coming from someone who understands her. You are a hero to her." Cat started to stir and demanded Jaimie, Miguel asked about Cat to which John joked, "She is an eight-month-old version of Jaimie, her twin brother is just like Michael. Two mini versions of themselves to have to endure for the next 17 years." Miguel asked about Michael and gave his best to the boy; he was going to be disappointed. John giggled and said, "He actually didn't want to come; he preferred to go to the Heat game tonight. He'll be happy you asked about him, though." The group left and arrived back at the hotel a half hour later. John recounted the events and what happened to Tegan which got Michael to cheer up. Jaimie tried to use the excitement to beg again for a bikini only to be told the same resounding no. Michael felt well enough to attend the Heat game but that turned out to be extremely boring for him. He liked basketball but the atmosphere and fans were boring to him. He said, "Maybe the ones in Boston will be fun, down here it's dull." John laughed and agreed. The next few days were a flurry of activity. They went down south to Key West for two days of tropical fun. John got them to visit some historical sites and museums to make up for having to babysit the twins while Valerie, Michael, and Jaimie enjoyed snorkeling and swimming in the tropical waters. The Everglades were next and the group enjoyed an airboat ride as well as guided tours. The kids got a kick out of watching alligators eat, with Michael jumping back in fear while Jaimie laughed. Saturday saw the group going to the beach for one last time. Jaimie stopped making her requests for a bikini while Michael continued to tease her. John asked one last time and was told, "You will let met wear it when I am ready to wear it." John handed it to her and watched her almost cry, saying, "That's all I needed to hear. A mature person doesn't beg, they accept no for an answer." Jaimie only wore it for a half hour because as soon as she stepped outside the hotel wearing it guys were ogling and catcalling her. One even asked if she wanted to party, John loudly shouted, "She's only 13." There were a bunch of disappointed sounds as Jaimie tried to cover up. John explained, "This is why I didn't want you to wear one; it brings out the worst in guys." Michael tried to tease her but Valerie quickly said, "Keep it up and you will be in a speedo." Michael meekly apologized. Monday morning John got lots of requests for pictures. Talking with the other teachers before school John told them about the Miami incidents. Mrs. Eagleson, the kids' former 7th-grade teacher, joked, "She handled it better than I did, I almost cried when the first boys looked at me." Mr. Taylor joked, "You should have held out longer, I think you could have gotten free house cleaning services." The group laughed and nodded in agreement. John recalled the events of the Everglades and Key West, getting more laughs. Alice Rodriguez stated, "Only you could go on vacation and turn it into work." John proudly said, "It's not work if you love what you are doing." The others loudly agreed as John finished up his soda and went to class. John gave his students their gifts and told them about the sites he visited. Jaimie and Michael held off giving their friends their gifts until after school so the other students weren't jealous. Michael teased Jaimie about the bikini which Richard proudly said, "I didn't hear about you showing off most of your body to strangers so why are you teasing her." Michael tried to reply but their friends laughed saying, "Serves you right!" Michael looked at Courtney who shook her head in disappointment adding, "Forget about seeing me in one." Michael muttered a quick apology to Jaimie asking her to forgive him; Jaimie hugged him to end it. The kids looked at John and asked if they could go to the beach. The kids were jealous of Jaimie and Michael and the weather was improving to the point that they could enjoy the sand. John looked at Scott and Jessica who looked as eager as their friends and agreed, provided their parents approve. Greta and Quentin loved the idea as did Anne and Olivia. Lilly and Gabby didn't want to go against the flow and with along with the plan provided that the kids were on their best behavior. Dan and Melanie were going stir crazy and agreed to go along as well, the baby was old enough to go out and they needed a break. Rebecca got her friends to go as well making the group trip seem like an invasion. The week went by fast as the kids were focused on school again. The group kept reminding John about the beach trip and insisted that he not give them a lot of homework. John smiled saying, "I only give it when you need it" then admitted he had no plans to do so for a while. The kids did all their work for their other classes earning John more eager stares from the kids. When Saturday came the group descended on the beach. Hannah and Bryan joined them along with Leslie and Karen. 18 teens and tweens along with a dozen parents set up camp. Jaimie and the girls wore their bikinis with Will, Richard, and Michael almost fainting from the sight. Only Scott kept his composure, simply saying, "You look lovely" to Stacy. Dan and Melanie looked at Quentin and Greta nodding in approval, whispering to John, "That boy will make every other boy in the city look bad." John replied back, "Good, they need to see an example of how you should act around women." The day was a smashing success; the group loved it and made plans for the next month saying, "We hope the water is warmer so we can swim." Their parents agreed provided they keep up their grades. Chapter 23: Semi-Formal and Confrontations Jaimie and Scott were eager to recount their beach adventure to their therapists. After she had seen him the first time Dr. Eliza had lingering doubts about the boy. He and Jaimie were friendly and nothing appeared to show their past history. Scott noticed what the date was and started to shake as tears welled up. Jaimie saw it as well and told him, "It's all right, that was two years ago and it led to the best thing to ever happen to me." He mumbled, "I can't forget it, though; I hate what I did to you." Jaimie held him close saying, "I know, but it wasn't you." Dr. Eliza watched Jaimie comforting the crying Scott. She wasn't sure what to make of it. Inside Dr. Eliza's office, Jaimie told her about the events of the past month and particularly smiled when she mentioned Scott and Stacy at the beach. Dr. Eliza focused on Scott which started to annoy Jaimie. Jaimie sensed the doctor didn't believe her about Scott, Dr. Eliza still asked away about him. She told Dr. Eliza about her dad's defense of him and his subsequent replacement as her history teacher. Dr. Eliza listened but was clearly uninterested in this. When she tried again to dig into Scott but Jaimie finally broke. She stood up and walked toward the door. As she reached for the door handle she turned and bluntly stated, "Scott is changed and you need to accept that. You should know better than anyone what it is like to have someone forced to be someone they aren't because they feared abuse and wanted to please their parents. Just because he isn't becoming a girl doesn't make what happened to him any different than what is happening to us. Scott is a good person, he is my friend, and what he did in the past is just that- the past. Now excuse me, it's the anniversary of the day he caused dad to take me into his home and he is feeling miserable about remembering it. A good friend comforts their friends when needed and he needs me." Jaimie sat down next to John and Scott, giving a scowl to Dr. Eliza as she hugged Scott. John asked her what was going on, Jaimie didn't reply only stared at the doctor. John asked to speak with her alone, and when the two were in her office he told her, "Whatever you have against Scott needs to stop. Despite what you may believe he is not a bad person. He is nothing like the boy he was two years ago. The only person who can't seem to accept that it wasn't his fault is you. If you can't accept that then we will seek treatment elsewhere because Jaimie is being adversely affected by your own prejudices and it won't be long before Scott realizes what is going on and it affects him as well. Jaimie can handle this but Scott is still fragile and your actions could cause him irreparable damage." John stormed out and gathered their things. Scott followed behind. Dr. Dane watched and asked, "What is going on? Why is Scott leaving?" Dr. Eliza told him what happened between her and John. Dr. Dane became furious, telling her, "What you did is unforgivable. You not only caused one of your patients to walk out you severely impacted another patient's recovery. It'll take us weeks to undo the damage you just caused if he comes back at all." Dr. Eliza was speechless. Dr. Dane asked for Scott's personal information and excused himself. Dr. Eliza watched as several other patients stared at her in disbelief and disdain. Greta talked with Dr. Dane about Scott. She expressed her outrage over Dr. Eliza and let him know he would be seeking treatment elsewhere. She called John and he let her know Scott was feeling better and that he was happy. Scott took the phone and said, "I'm fine mom, Mr. Finn stood up for me with the other doctor and I don't feel bad anymore." Greta gasped at what he said. John looked at him and just smiled as he told Greta, "Yes, he did say mom." Greta started to cry tears of joy. Scott realized what he had said and looked at John. John nodded and said, "She is your mom, Quentin is your dad, and Jessica is your sister. Don't let anyone tell you otherwise. You are the last one to realize this and I believe you just came to terms." Scott burst into tears as John comforted him. Scott tearfully said, "I'm happy she didn't get mad." John proudly said, "She would never get mad at you for saying that. She has been waiting for you to accept her as your mother since she started the adoption process." John and the kids tried to take their minds off the day and talked about the semi-formal dance. Scott was let in on the intricacies and shown what Michael wore the year before. John handed him a small package saying, "You will need this; all of your friends are wearing theirs." Scott opened it and saw a gold chain with an "S" pendant. Scott asked what this was about, Jaimie proudly said, "It's our thing; all of us have one even Jessica." Scott thanked them and put his on. When Greta came by to pick up Scott he showed her the gift. She asked, "Is this the tradition Jessica mentioned?" Jaimie nodded saying, "It sort of grew as each one of us had a birthday, now all 12 of us have one." Greta smiled and said, "It's beautiful, son." Scott blushed and hugged her as they left. The next two days they spent shopping for their dresses and suits. The boys chose a different shade of gray, this time going with a white shirt to go with the suit. Jaimie and the girls went to a hairdresser this year. Her hair finally grew long enough to get extensions and proper styling. The girls cheered as she took off the blonde wig she had been wearing since July, saying, "It's time to bury that bad memory." When they were returned home their parents were speechless. The boys couldn't take their eyes off the girls. Ever the gentleman Scott broke the silence and said, "You look stunning girls." They blushed and thanked him for saying so which got the other boys to start repeating, "You look stunning." Quentin and Dan shook their heads as the boys tried to recover from their hormonal fog. In school the next day several boys howled and catcalled the girls which brought groans of frustration from the other girls in class. Jessica's and Jenna's dates were speechless, staring at them while not being able to say anything for fear of angering them. The girls smiled and said, "Thank you for being mature enough to not say anything." The boys were embarrassed but said, "Thank you, girls." John was put into the tough position of being a chaperone yet again. He would be joined by Courtney's mother Gabby as well as parents from the 7th-grade classes. John didn't have much time to change so he wore a fancy suit to school that day. The kids teased him but were happy that one of their favorite teachers was going to be at the dance. John pointed out, "I'll be there as a parent not as your teacher." His fellow teachers gave him a good ribbing as well, saying, "You look like you are working at one of those fancy prep schools." John laughed it up with them saying, "Nah, not my style." Jessica and Scott were the most excited about the dance. It was their first and it was one worth remembering. Rebecca was put to work doing the girls' makeup and hair while the boys were sent off to Scott's house to change. Dan and Quentin helped them, both lamenting John not being there to do it. John helped with the last minute preparations in the gym while the kids got prepared. Dorothy and Alice watched him help, with Dorothy saying, "He puts in more work than anyone in the school, it's a shame we may be losing him to the high school." Alice nodded adding, "He is better suited there. He loves to teach and there are more students to teach to. Others are taking notice and adjusting to the new times thanks to him. John Finn is going to be a legend in this city for all of the right reasons." John and the students finished with plenty of time to spare. Students started to arrive while John was left waiting for his group. Gabby arrived ahead of the group and talked with John while Dan, Quentin, and Valerie parked. The girls immediately hugged John who took several group photos before they entered. The kids marveled at the transformed gym. Jessica took a bunch of pictures and sent them to her old friends in Missouri saying, "They wanted to see if it was really true." Jaimie took Jessica's phone and had her, Scott, Stacy, and Jessica's date Miles pose for a photo and sent it to Jessica's old friends. They immediately texted back their jealousy and asked about Scott. Jessica only said, "He's doing great here and is among great friends. We are staying here permanently now." Jessica was sad to let her friends go but deleted their numbers after sending that, Jaimie smiled saying, "You can't replace them but you at least have good alternatives." Jessica hugged the girls and boys leaving Miles jealous but understanding the reaction. The girls started dancing as soon as the music started. The boys joined in with Scott and Stacy dancing on their own. Stacy and Scott drew a lot of proud stares, the new boy, and the established loner girl together was a big shock but a lot of eyes grew jealous of the happy couple. They were oblivious to the looks; they only had eyes for each other and their friends. John asked how her sons were doing. Gabby wasn't too happy with them saying, "They have no respect, they don't listen, and they are mouthy." John was sympathetic saying, "I hope it's just a phase, I have seen some good people go through that phase and come out productive people." Gabby agreed, saying, "At least they limit their bad behavior to the home, at least for now. I still owe Jaimie for their actions last year." Gabby watched Claire and Will, asking John, "Do you think those two will last? He is good with her but they don't seem as close as Richard/Jaimie or Michael/Courtney." John smiled and said, "None of these may last. It could grow into more or it could be like Melanie and me, just close friendships." Will and Claire were talking and smiling. John hoped they would last, they looked good together. The dance went on for three hours. By the last dance, John was exhausted more than the kids. He had to keep a few boys from getting overly friendly with the girls but overall it was boring. His group was well behaved; Miles and Jenna's date were gentlemen. At the end of the night, John and the group drove home with the boys kissing the girls on the cheek. Scott hugged Stacy goodbye, Stacy grabbed him and kissed him on the lips which caught everyone by surprise. Scott just let her do it and didn't fight, looking enamored and surprised after she broke it off. Stacy smiled at him saying, "My perfect gentleman." The others said their goodbyes with nobody trying to kiss anyone else, Scott and Stacy had stolen their thunder. Chapter 24: Presentations and Fun The kids stayed in all weekend. They had a fun Friday night but didn't want to do much the next two days. Michael and Jaimie found different things to keep themselves busy and they were texting back and forth with their friends but it was a weekend to do as little as possible. Monday morning brought a shock to the group. Judge Mitchell was in Boston for a conference and wanted to a meeting with the kids to see how they were doing. John saw this visit as an advantage and asked him, "Would you be willing to do a presentation for their classmates?" Judge Mitchell was flattered and agreed. They set the plans for Wednesday. John told the other parents about the visitor and swore them to secrecy. The kids enjoyed their unscheduled presentation. Judge Mitchell enjoyed talking about his job and his hometown. The kids asked a lot of interesting questions that Judge Mitchell had to think about. Jaimie, Scott, Michael, and Jessica kept silent. They knew things weren't entirely rosy back in their former county but he was painting a good picture for the kids. During the last class, Judge Mitchell quietly asked, "Which one is Jaimie?" John didn't answer, letting the judge enjoy the mystery for as long as possible. Before class ended John said, "Jaimie can you come up here?" Judge Mitchell's mouth dropped open in surprise as he saw the girl whose fate he had decided nearly two years before standing proudly before him. She was nothing like the short, skinny child who stood before him in court; she was a blossoming young woman who was indistinguishable from her classmates. In fact, she had been sitting directly in front of him for the whole class, he never noticed anything about her other than she was looking at him differently than the others. Judge Mitchell composed himself after the initial shock and finally said, "I could not for the life of me recognize you. Two years has completely changed you." Jaimie blushed and said, "That was thanks to you letting dad keep me." She hugged him while her classmates watched in a mix of shock, surprise, and wonder. Michael whispered what this was about to Richard who passed it along to the others. As the class ended John said, "Please thank Judge Mitchell for his time today." The class did so and added, "And thank you for letting Jaimie stay with Mr. Finn." Judge Mitchell left the group and thanked them for the interesting day adding, "It was time well spent, those conferences are a painful bore but this was a great joy." The kids laughed as the judge walked out. The kids left and told their parents about the presentation with the huge surprised look being the big topic. Outside Judge Mitchell pulled Scott out to the hall and had a quick talk with him about things so far. He listened as Scott told all about Jaimie and the others and his new parents. Judge Mitchell smiled and proudly said, "Son, you are in a better place and with the best people for you. Your new parents are lucky to have such a good son. Keep an eye on Jaimie and the others, one day you may help repay their generosity." Scott asked about his former father. Judge Mitchell shook his head in disgust and mumbled, "He violated the protection order so his bail was voided. He assaulted a deputy arresting him so he is now going to state prison for assault in addition to the charges against him on your behalf. He won't be seeing the outside world for at least five years if not longer. You are safe from now on, he can't hurt you anymore." Scott hugged him and thanked him for the assistance. Judge Mitchell didn't reply, letting the boy get his anxiety out. Greta and Quentin thanked the judge who refused their thanks, saying, "You did something for him that no amount of gratitude can top. John told me about the adoption, I am sending a letter on Scott's behalf to encourage it to move forward. You four deserve it." The next day in school the kids started talking about the judge and John got an idea. He assigned them projects to do regarding big legal cases. The kids read about several of them already but this would be a big expansion of the book learning. To the surprise of John, the kids were eager to do the projects. To make things interesting John assigned partners. The group was split up among their various classmates. Scott and Jaimie were specifically partnered with quiet kids who showed potential while the rest were partnered by pure luck. The group was splintered with only Will and Claire getting partnered. Claire and Will were still uneasy. Despite dating for months the two just couldn't find a middle ground and be comfortable with one another. Claire was brash and bossy while Will was subtle and let others lead. He was laid back and all too willing to go along with your ideas. Working with Claire pushed that demeanor to the limit. She knew just what buttons to push and what to say to get him to complain. Eventually, the two reached their limit and started arguing. Jaimie and Michael had to talk with them to figure out the problem. Michael and Jaimie told the two exactly what was going on to which both complained. Jaimie told Claire, "Stop trying to control the project" while Michael told Will, "Start doing more things." Will started to take the lead and Claire listened to his ideas. Will made a few suggestions that built upon her initial ideas and the two had a compromise that turned out better than either had been able to do on their own. John was pleased; this was his plan all along. The kids were learning how to deal with each other and learning something as well. After a week of working at home and a few minutes at the end of class, the big day came and the kids made their presentations. John was pleased that Jaimie's partner was doing most of the presenting. The same was true of Scott and his partner. Will and Claire's presentation turned out to be the best one, with the class surprised that the two had put together something good. John gave the two their prize then told the class the real reason for the projects. The kids groaned in disappointment but smiled at his subtle sneakiness. Their parents seemed to like the whole thing, with John getting more praise. Olivia wasn't happy that she had to oversee a date between the four kids, but was happy that Claire and Will were finally getting along better. The 10 days of the joint projects saw Jaimie's 14th birthday arrive. Again it was taking place up in the amusement park and again the kids all went. This year Stacy stayed close to Scott who was looking forward to the park as much as the kids, he had never been to one before and this would be a new experience. Jessica and Jenna stayed together. They ended up having more fun as friends than the others had as couples. The two grew close over the months as the others were constantly with each other as their friends coupled up leaving them on the sidelines. Jenna didn't seem to care that she was always the one left behind, she just wanted them happy. Jessica was still getting used to the big city and the boys weren't sure what to make of her yet so she was satisfied with sitting out the whole dating scene for a bit. Jenna joked to Jessica, "We need to have another sleepover." Jaimie overheard and asked, "When was the last time we had one?" Jenna recalled the October incident and cringed, Jessica, asking, "What happened?" Jaimie whispered to her the story and Jessica giggled and said, "Of course it had to be him." Jaimie and Jenna giggled again with Jaimie saying, "We need another one before we get too old." She called the other four girls over and the seven girls made plans. Stacy teased, "Make sure to have chocolate on hand just in case." Jenna stuck her tongue out as the others laughed. John looked at Quentin and said, "OK you get the boys now since it was your daughter who started this." The boys and girls split up for the weekend. Bryan and Hannah joined the others as they had nothing planned. The boys played football for an hour then basketball before heading to Scott's house. They collapsed in the living room while eating pizza and talking about the girls. Will joked to Bryan, "You must be happy to get any girl in school." Bryan proudly said, "They are nice but they are a bit immature. They only want one thing." The boys looked at him seeking more but he realized his mistake saying, "Sorry, you guys are too young." Will joking said, "Well at least their boobs look nicer." Scott teased him saying, "You wouldn't know the difference." Richard, Michael, and Bryan were silent; Will noticed this and said, "No way- you three have seen girls topless before?" Michael and Bryan admitted, "It's a price to pay with sisters." The others cringed and laughed while Scott blushed. Richard still looked embarrassed. Will picked this up and asked, "You don't have a sister, how could you have?" Before he could finish he realized what he had seen and said, "When did you see Jaimie's?" Richard meekly admitted, "Last October, she left the door open and I saw everything. We told you this before but thankfully you forgot about it." Michael rolled his eyes at that event and said, "It was something Jaimie used to do because of her cruel foster parents She only stopped when dad and her therapist had a long talk with her." Richard meekly said, "That wasn't the only time; she did it again when I stayed over and tried to get me over that incident." Michael shook his head saying, "I tried to forget that one, don't you remember- everyone all but abandoned me!" Scott asked Michael and Bryan, "Is this what I have to look forward to with Jessica?" The boys said, "If you are lucky it's only once" as the boys laughed. Quentin popped his head in and said, "Thanks for telling me, I needed to make get more ground rules laid out." The boys laughed moving on to another topic. Richard couldn't get the picture of Jaimie out of his head, though. Michael looked at him and said, "You are lucky; you got a gift most boys would kill for." Bryan added, "Just don't tell her or uncle you liked it." Richard mumbled, "He already knows." Will, Scott, and Bryan all looked at Richard with surprised faces. Richard was still alive which meant John had given him a pass. Michael had to explain, "He told dad the truth. He liked what he saw and said Jaimie was beautiful then got a big kiss from Jaimie. He ran off after the second time because he didn't want to do anything yet. Jaimie ran after him and told him she liked him no matter what I felt." Bryan changed subjects as fast as possible giving the boys something else to talk about. Richard mouth a, "Thank you," to him that nobody noticed. Over at the Finn house, Jaimie and the girls were having a grand time. All eight spent hours talking. John took Cat and JD over to look in on Dan who was spending time with DJ. Melanie and Valerie went for a girl's night out with Leslie, Karen, and the other mothers. Dan looked at John and stifled a laugh. The girls had overwhelmed him with their hyperactivity. John groaned saying, "Remind me to lower their grades." Dan just laughed and said, "Better your house than mine." John shot him a dirty look then added, "I think I need to have a word with Rebecca and Jessie about another sleepover, this time at your house." Dan's face dropped. John got him good. Dan knew it was only a matter of time before the six younger girls wanted one of their own and it was his turn to host! John asked him how the business was, getting a simple, "Surging." John asked how the side business was getting a simple, "Profitable." John nodded as the two sat silently while the babies slept. Both were happy to have the time to relax even if it was outside with one ear on the house. Inside the girls started to talk about the boys. Jessica quietly asked Jaimie a painful question, "Do you miss your?you know whats?" Jaimie burst into laughter saying, "I don't miss them at all." Claire asked, "How small has it gotten?" Jaimie pulled her shorts and panties down and showed them. The others looked on in intrigue, Hannah just shook her head and said, "Most girls would be creeped out yet you are actually intrigued by this." Claire came to after a second and thanked Jaimie for being open about this. Jaimie just shrugged and said, "It's just a piece of skin; it'll be gone in four years anyway." The girls asked, "Are you sure?" Jaimie nodded yes saying, "I know it doesn't make me a ?woman' but I don't want to have that reminder that I am different. It's useless and I don't need it anymore." Jenna asked, "Did you really flash Richard? Michael and he had a big fight in January and you told us what happened but it just seems so out unlike you to do that." Jaimie meekly said, "I did. I just wanted him to get over being how uncomfortable he was around me ever since he saw me naked in October." Jessica asked, "Completely, even seeing your thingy?" Jaimie nodded, adding, "I kept up an old habit from the foster care days. I didn't stop until after dad told me I had nothing to fear anymore. Michael and Richard had a fight and he was weird around me until January when I flashed him thinking he might snap out of it and we would be normal boyfriend/girlfriend again. He took it badly and went to spend the week with Will and Aunt Leslie." The other girls were in disbelief until Hannah said, "It's a hazard of having a sibling. You end up accidentally flashing your brother at some point. Jessica, you better remember that because it's only a matter of time before you accidentally show Scott, same thing with you Stacy and Rebecca." Both blushed in embarrassment with Stacy saying, "At least I only have four years of watching out, Rebecca has six." Jaimie asked Courtney and Claire if it happened to them yet. Both admitted it never happened to them. The girls weren't surprised, their brothers didn't like them or were never home when they were so it wasn't likely to happen. The girls started giggling and talking about other boys and topics. Jaimie whispered to Jessica, "Having fun yet?" Jessica smiled and whispered back, "This is better than the ones we had, I am sorry you missed out on them." Jaimie shot back, "It wouldn't have mattered, you know the parents would never have allowed it. Thankfully we have had several of these already to make up for it." The girls stayed up late into the night and slept in late the next day. By noon the girls sat in front of the TV and watched a bunch of teen movies. Over at Quentin's house, Scott and the boys were up early and played football. Bryan asked the boys if they were going to play next year. Only Scott said no. Scott defended his decision saying, "I don't want to unleash that side of me anymore. I would rather watch." Bryan said, "Uncle John had the same problem, he was too afraid to play because he didn't want to hurt anyone. He played anyway and enjoyed the friendship of his teammates. Plus it'll help you get out the built up frustration and gets you two dozen guys to back you up." Scott agreed to play provided his parents allowed him to. Quentin shot in, "There's nothing wrong with playing as long as it's safe." The kids got together for a big dinner on Saturday night. The couples paired off while Jenna and Jessica sat with Rebecca. Rebecca boldly asked them, "Why aren't any of the other boys in your class good enough to date?" Jenna tried to come up with a good excuse but couldn't. Jessica asked, "What about Eric and George? They are pretty fun in class and everyone gets along with them. I know they like us but are too scared to do anything. Plus I think Miles doesn't like us since he always heads away from us at lunch." Jenna thought about them saying, "Eric is too short and George tries too hard to be funny." Jessica asked, "So what if George tones down the bad jokes?" Jenna thought it over and agreed with her. He was good otherwise. Jessica and Jenna decided to talk with them on Monday. They aren't bad guys and they were two of the few who were friendly with the group without being intimidated by them. They also know they feared the other five more than anyone else which would be a huge plus if they ever got frisky or offensive. Jessica mouthed, "Thank you," to Rebecca who winked back. Dan and Quentin saw the little exchange and both said, "uh oh." Rebecca whispered in Quentin's ear, "Just trying to get them dates." Quentin winced while Dan laughed, saying, "Rebecca did it again." Quentin asked, "Does she always know here to hit you hardest?" Dan smiled and said, "It's her job; she's the voice of reason around here. She isn't afraid to tell you like it is even if it hurts." Rebecca beamed with pride and said, "Those two needed a kick in the right direction." Chapter 25: Awards and Reconciliations Scott and his mother decided that despite Dr. Eliza's intrusion he should continue seeing his therapist with Greta taking him from now on. At the office, Dr. Eliza saw Scott and Greta waiting and asked to speak with him. Greta knew who she was and asked what the purpose of the talk. Scott accepted but only if his mother was with him. Dr. Eliza agreed and took them into her office. Dr. Eliza was quick to apologize saying to them, "I let my personal feelings get the better of me. I know you are a victim as much as Jaimie and I know you are trying to move forward. I just had trouble seeing a drastic change in somebody as being possible. My patients are almost always victims of similar abuse and until you came here I had never encountered a victim and abuser together let alone one who had befriended and protected each other." Greta asked her bluntly, "Did you ever consider asking him about this? You have called in her friends before; this should have been dealt with directly the first time." Dr. Eliza didn't know what to say, she had not considered that option. She was so quick to jump to conclusions to protect Jaimie she didn't think to address it directly. Scott spoke up and said, "Mr. Finn knows me better than most other people. He saw me at my worst and still believed in me. Even with Jaimie still hurting from what I had done to her he tried to help me. Jaimie and Michael were victims of what I did and they have accepted me. I just want to move on and not relive the past again." Greta comforted him and asked, "Does that satisfy your concerns? He is a changed boy whether you believe him or not." Dr. Eliza apologized profusely to Scott asked his forgiveness. Scott accepted it and went back to await his appointment. Dr. Eliza called John and asked if Jaimie could still be her patient, telling him that she had apologized to Scott and listened to what he had to say, telling him that Greta pointed out a huge mistake she made. John said he would ask Jaimie and if she was OK with it he would restart their sessions. Jaimie looked at him and asked, "She talked with him, didn't she?" John nodded and said, "She realized she screwed up and should have talked to him directly." Jaimie smiled. Just as she had planned. Dr. Eliza did what she did out of concern, not malice, she showed that she actually cared about Jaimie. Jaimie quietly asked to start seeing her again, but only if Scott was OK with it. A week later Scott and Jamie went to their therapy appointments. Jessica was along as well since John decided to take her and Scott to the annual senior awards night. Dr. Eliza introduced herself to Jessica who told her she was Scott's new sister and an old classmate of Jaimie. Dr. Eliza asked her to come inside so she could speak with her and get a better picture of Jaimie before she was Jaimie, Jessica was happy to help but wasn't sure she could say anything new. Jaimie assured her it was OK and talked about Jessica's reaction upon her initial return to town. Jessica then told about the reaction the kids had in school after Jaimie's grand exit as well as the regret several of them felt about letting her suffer alone. She told about how the girls were reluctant to cross Scott or his friends to help Jaimie and how parents didn't want their kids associating with the weird loner. Dr. Eliza listened and asked about when Jaimie came back for Christmas break. Jessica told about the girls' reactions to her new look and the feeling of guilt they felt. She talked about how they enjoyed her more as a girl and wished she had been that way when she lived there. Jessica was on the verge of tears but Jaimie assured her, "You told me this already, it's OK" Jessica said, "It still didn't make it right." Jaimie talked about meeting the judge again and seeing him in utter disbelief. Dr. Eliza asked why this was surprising; Jaimie laughed and said, "He made me feel like I was finally a new person. Someone who knew me didn't even recognize me even though I was sitting right in front of him and it was great!" Dr. Eliza smiled at that. Jaimie moved on to other things as Jessica listened. Jaimie talked about the sleepover and what she did. Dr. Eliza asked, "Why did you do that?" Jaimie without hesitation said, "There are no secrets between us and it was only fair as I had seen theirs before. They trust me enough to change in front of me they should have the same trust." Jessica blushed at the memory. Dr. Eliza asked about their responses, Jaimie looked at Jessica and said, "They were surprised that I wanted it gone more than seeing it. They didn't even care that it was there just that I wanted it gone." Dr. Eliza asked, "Did that make you happy?" Jaimie said, "They made me feel like a real girl." Jessica added, "You are one." The session was over fast and Jaimie and Jessica waited for Scott's session to end. John drove the three of them to the high school and waited for the start. John and the teachers talked while Jaimie showed Scott and Jessica around the school. Jake Bollinger caught up with them and talked with them for a bit, smiling as he realized they were the two people John had stuck his neck out for in Missouri. Jake told them, "We have a present for your dad; we figured it would be a good time to give it to him." The three were sworn to secrecy with Jake saying, "Why don't you two give it to John when the time comes." Scott and Jessica were unsure but Jaimie said, "It'll be fun." They agreed to do it. The ceremony was bland and took seemingly forever. John and Jaimie's presentations were the last ones as usual due to the amount they gave out. When the time came Jaimie went first allowing John to take center stage. John handed his scholarships over and received a large amount of applause. As John was leaving Jake stopped him, saying, "We have one more item to hand out tonight. Scott and Jessica would you kindly come up here." The two came up to the stage and took out a large envelope handing it to John who promptly opened it. Looking at the item inside John asked, "How did you get this? Commencement isn't until this weekend." Jake proudly said, "Your dean felt this was the best place for you to receive it, among the students you taught and as a way of ?passing the torch' to the new students at the college. Congratulations on earning your degree, Mr. Finn." The crowd applauded as Jaimie, Scott, and Jessica hugged John. John was still upset, though. He earned his degree but he hadn't received word regarding his waiver. He was ready to give up, telling Jake, "It's done. I'll need to find a new practicum next year. Thanks for the chance to teach here, give my best to Mr. Leeds and Ms. Paula." Jake assured him, "There is still time, you know how the state is." John shook his head in defeat anyway. Jaimie, Scott, and Jessica tried to console John on the way back home. Jessica told him, "You will always have these three months. You are the best teacher no matter what people say." Scott said, "Only you would fight for a person you barely knew who had harmed your loved ones." Jaimie added, "You have been at your lowest before and come out on top. Give it time, you will be our teacher." At home John was depressed. Valerie and Michael tried to console him but it did little. Cat did a better job of it, hugging him and falling asleep in his arms. John managed to calm down but still felt down. At school the next day the kids tried extra hard for him. Scott got the idea of writing to the licensing commission on his behalf which the kids all agreed to. The students in the other classes started to do their own writing until several dozen letters were finished. Jaimie and Michael got the information and sent the package to the commission with a cover page explaining the situation. They knew it was a long shot but they still sent it out with the hope that it might sway some favor even if slim. The students' action caught the notice of the principals. Both were shocked that they would go to such lengths for a teacher let alone one who had only taught them for six weeks. They asked for a few minutes of time before John's next class and thanked them for their support for him even if it may be misguided and fruitless. The kids responded by saying, "We had to try, he deserves it." John inquired as to what was going on but was only told, "We needed to address something but it was nothing to worry about." John nodded but felt something was off. The kids saw he was suspicious and came clean. John got tears in his eyes and thanked them but assured them it was his fight, not theirs. Quentin and John decided it was time for a guy's night. John needed something to keep his mind occupied and the three of them needed time away from the kids. Quentin suggested a game and added that Scott and Michael go along so it was a father/son trip. Scott and Michael were happy to go. Quentin made a big deal out of it but Scott calmed him down saying he didn't see the big deal. Michael pointed out, "They called it father/son that's pretty big." John just looked at Quentin who didn't even realize he said, "Father/son". Scott was all smiles, though, that was the first time he had heard him call him his son directly. The foursome got cheap seats away from the action but loved just relaxing without the girls or school. John told about games he had been to before with family and friends. The boys cringed at the stories about the bathrooms, Quentin looked at John as if he was lying but John proudly said, "You can look it up online, they were terrible and the stuff of legend." Scott asked about games Quentin went to and was told about seeing crowds of several thousand or crowds who cheered mostly for the visiting team. John remembered seeing those games on TV adding, "The announcers had fun pointing out that the game didn't matter, it was about the fun to those fans." Quentin nodded in agreement as the boys groaned. The group didn't even pay attention to the game, after a while they just went exploring around the stadium. The crowd was rowdy and rambunctious; Scott and Michael heard a lot of swearing and profanities that brought laughs. Michael joked, "I wonder if they were that vulgar when dad was our age." John proudly said, "No, they were worse. And that was just from my sisters and brother." Michael said, "Why am I not surprised Uncle Roland was like that." John nodded knowingly at him as Michael explained what he meant to Scott. The four left before the end of the game, not bothering with the crowds and traffic. John thanked Quentin for the idea and said they should do that again in the summer with the rest of the group. Scott asked if John felt better, John said yes which made Scott relieved. Scott said, "I wanted to do something like this for years." Quentin proudly said, "We will do it again son." Scott heard him say, "Son" which made him proud, Scott hugged him and thanked him for calling him that. John and Michael walked home as the two were still in a big embrace. Chapter 26: Memorial Day John was feeling better but a bit down. He decided to give the family a break and take them to Cape Cod for the weekend. Some time away from the city would do them good and John could focus solely on the family. Jaimie and Michael pleaded to take Richard and Courtney but John wanted a simple family trip. Joseph and Evelyn would make the trip with them but none of their friends were going. The family left after school on Friday. The minivan was already packed and Joseph had most of the bags in his car. The drive was mostly the kids complaining about missing their friends but a few stern looks from Valerie stopped that. The drive was faster than normal despite the usual delays and backups at the bridges. Michael and Jaimie texted their friends nonstop with Jaimie showing pictures of where they were at. The kids were jealous but knew not to complain as it was for the greater good of John. The eight arrived at the cottage and unpacked. The kids quickly ran down to the beach and inspected the area not bothering to wait for the adults. They weren't happy that there was just cottage after cottage and little on the beach except for sand. The two complained about the desolation to which John and Valerie told them, "Exactly why we chose it." The kids weren't happy, but John insisted, "It's a family weekend, we will have some fun but I wanted it just to be us eight." Michael complained about no video games and Jaimie wanted her friends but the look on John's face told them it was pointless to argue. They would either deal with it or face punishment. John sat down in a chair on the porch with Cat and JD in his lap. The twins fell asleep forcing John to sit and relax, unable to move with the twins weighing him down. Valerie and the kids left him alone, heading down to the water to walk the beach for a while. Joseph and Evelyn sat down next to John and talked with him. John asked, "Joseph how do you do it? You are retired and have the time to do anything you want but you don't seem frustrated or bored." Joseph shook his head and said, "Stop calling me Joseph. You are my son-in-law, not some friend, call me dad or pop or father but not Joseph. You don't have to be polite anymore; you earned the right to call me dad." John was puzzled by his response. Evelyn laughed at John saying, "He's been trying to get you to stop for months but didn't have the right time to do it. And please just call me mom as well" John said, "OK mom, dad I'll comply." Joseph said thanks and answered John, "I found some things to do to keep busy. I miss working but I am happy to have the free time now and be there for the kids. You should be proud that you tried hard and you still have the chance to make a difference even if your first choice falls through. The kids will understand and they love you regardless, that's all the kids not just your group of 10." Evelyn added, "There is still hope, it may seem fleeting but there is still hope." John felt a lot better hearing that from his in-laws. After an hour Valerie and the kids returned. John handed JD to Valerie while he took Cat setting both down in their crib. Jaimie and Michael asked what John was talking about before only to be told, "Just more reassurances from loved ones, nothing to be concerned about." They weren't convinced and said, "Don't give up hope dad; there will be a job for you even if it takes another year." Saturday morning the kids let the adults sleep in. When they finally woke up and cooked a late breakfast the kids went outside for a walk eventually finding some kids their age. The group invited them to join along in the fun as it was just them around for miles. The boys were drooling over Jaimie while the only girl didn't pay any attention to Michael. Michael didn't care. She was cute but he was too busy thinking about Courtney to bother trying to get her attention. Jaimie's suitors asked them to play volleyball. Michael sat back and relaxed instead of playing, letting Jaimie have her fun. The girl did the same, she didn't seem to even care what was going on. The boys had all eyes on Jaimie, watching her as she jumped and deflected the ball. Michael kept a close eye on them, they were a little too eager with her. Their eyes were always on her chest and never on her face. They only had one thing on their mind and he didn't like it. Eventually, the game was over and the boys asked Jaimie to go to their place to unwind. Michael tried to get her to decline but Jaimie brushed it off as being overprotective. The six walked to one of the cottages. The boy's parents were out so they were all alone. Michael sensed there was trouble brewing and tried to get Jaimie to go, mentioning that their parents would be looking for them by now. Jaimie didn't listen and started to talk with the boys. Eventually, they got to a game of truth or dare which the boys were purposely directing at Jaimie. Michael again got defensive and tried to get Jaimie to leave but she still wouldn't listen. The boys started to dare her to do more outlandish things. When it got to her stripping off her clothing Michael finally had enough and walked out, running to their cottage and telling their parents to come. Inside the other cottage, Jaimie didn't mind showing off for the boys, telling herself, "It's just a weekend and we won't see them again." The next dare though went too far. The boys dared her to take off her shorts and panties. Jaimie tried her best to get out of it but the boys were persistent. After several minutes she reluctantly took them off. What they saw shocked them. The boys saw her breasts but seeing the little piece of skin that didn't belong between her legs was too much for them to understand. The boys started to chase Jaimie, screaming any kind of insulting name possible. Michael came back in and punched one of them as he tried to hit Jaimie. The two others backed off as Michael was much larger than them and in a fit of rage. Jaimie got herself dressed and left with Michael, crying and saying, "I'm sorry" over and over again. Down the beach, Michael told her, "I may be overprotective but I can see trouble when it is brewing especially with boys. Just try to trust me more. I gave you the space you wanted but that only goes so far- I am still your brother and I will protect you." Jaimie agreed and was stopped by their parents who were then told about what happened. John and Valerie decided not to punish them as Jaimie learned her lesson. John pulled Michael aside and asked, "Why didn't you stop her?" Michael said, "I tried to but she completely ignored me. You guys keep telling me to give her space so I did. I didn't want to leave her alone so I came back as fast as I could. She made a mistake and learned a lesson but thankfully she didn't get hurt." John realized he did exactly what they asked him to do. He added, "Your only mistake was in letting her come in here without an adult. But you did what you could, we both know we can't change her mind once she has it set on something. She has a lot to learn but you are right she needs to make mistakes on her own." As John was talking with Michael Valerie talked with Jaimie. She told her, "Boys may seem nice but you need to learn to look at the way they are looking at you. Boys act a certain way for certain things. Michael saw that you need to learn that as well. You are a nice person and want to please everyone but sometimes being nice doesn't overrule the need to be safe." Jaimie grew embarrassed and said, "OK mom, I'll remember that." The group went into town for a late lunch. Jaimie and Michael were kept under close supervision so they weren't allowed to stray far. Jaimie was talking with John when she stopped mid-sentence. Up ahead was one of the boys from the cottage. John noticed her hesitation and egged her forward saying, "He can't hurt you; I doubt his parents would be pleased with what he did and what he says will be ignored in favor of something worse." Jaimie continued walking and talking with John. The boy saw her and made a snide remark about her being a boy. A lady next to him shushed him saying, "That's a terrible thing to say." He insisted saying, "I know that is a boy." She asked him, "And just how do you know?" He immediately shut up and said, "Never mind." The girl who was with them during the volleyball game popped out behind him and proudly said, "He was playing truth or dare with her and got a peek inside her panties." The lady was not amused and asked, "Was that what you were doing this morning when we went out?" The boys heard the anger in her voice and knew they were in trouble. They tried to plead their innocence but their looks towards Jaimie sealed their fates. The lady shouted, "I told you no girls over. And you dare to try to call her a boy? That is the last straw." The boys were escorted away and looked to be in serious trouble making Jaimie happy. Jaimie and John just walked along, Jaimie asking John, "How did you know?" John admitted, "Parents like to give their slack but they are just as likely to react negatively to their kids abusing it. They are in deep trouble and will probably be so for a while. No girls means no girls regardless of how beautiful they are." Jaimie felt bad for them but John said, "They needed to learn that lesson the hard way; they won't make that mistake again. And they deserved a harsh punishment for trying to hurt you." The others noticed the two talking and asked what went on. John told them the story and burst into laughter. Joseph and Evelyn shook their heads saying, "That's a hard lesson to learn." The group walked along and window shopped before eating. After lunch, they lounged around the porch and enjoyed the solitude. Jaimie and Michael enjoyed the beach while Valerie and the twins played in the sand. Joseph asked him about plans for the next day; John simply admitted, "There are none." Joseph nodded in agreement adding, "Good, it's the whole point of these cottage vacations." The next day the family just relaxed on the beach and around the cottage. John cooked dinner with the kids helping. The family spent the whole day together with nobody noticing they hadn't really done much all day. The kids even got used to not having their phones texting or ringing, which wasn't hard as Valerie had hidden them in a safe place Saturday afternoon. Monday morning the family departed the cottage. John told them they were making a quick stop before heading home, the kids asking, "Do we have to get flowers?" Joseph asked what the stop was for, John told him, "Visiting two important people at the cemetery." Evelyn seemed to realize who it was and said, "We can meet you at home later if you want privacy." John declined, adding, "It'll mean much more that you come." They dutifully followed John as he drove the 20 minutes to the cemetery. Inside John and the group stopped to say a few words. John quietly said, "I apologize that it's been two years but last year was hectic. I know you wouldn't be pleased but we are a family and we needed each other. Your new grandchildren won't have the luxury of meeting you but they at least know of you. The girls act just like you and I am proud to see that in them. The boys are athletic like you and knowing how much you loved sports it reminds me so much of you." Jaimie kissed her hand and patted the grass saying, "rest in peace, grandpa." Seeing her do it Michael followed suit. The next stop John said, "The kids miss you but not a day goes by that they don't remind us of you in so many ways." John saluted and the group departed. They arrived home an hour later with John feeling much better. Chapter 27: Graduation Buildup After a relaxing Memorial Day weekend, John and the family got into high gear for the kids' graduation. John sensed the kids were growing anxious to end the year so he tried to make the last few weeks count. He started a project with the kids where they would ask their parents and guardians about the music from when they were their age. Michael and Jaimie were given different tasks since John would also be participating. Michael had to ask his aunts while Jaimie asked her grandparents. The kids loved the project, some of the songs overlapped but John was pleased that everyone had something to contribute. Stacy's contribution caused John to burst out laughing, with John saying, "Your mom picked this on purpose." John explained the song to the class, saying, "Stacy's mother was involved in the first lip-sync concert for the high school, and this song was the one used in the promotional video." Stacy nodded adding, "She said you still owe her a performance." The kids burst into laughter as John turned red. Dorothy Vega popped her head in and asked what the commotion was and she herself started laughing at the joke. John meekly replied, "Why do I have the feeling you kids will remember this next fall." The kids in unison replied, "We will." John went through the other songs and played several songs from varying years to the amazement of the kids. Michael's contributions made John smile. He proudly said, "Of course they would choose ?New Kids On The Block'". John admitted, "My sisters played this song over and over again to the point that I knew every lyric by heart. Leslie's teammates once paid me to dance to the song during one of their road games." The kids again laughed at him. Jaimie's songs were a nice change of pace and the kids seemed to enjoy hearing the oldies music. One even said, "That's not so bad; it sounds better than some of the current stuff." John joked, "That's one response I didn't expect." John finally played his selection and got the kids both puzzled and intrigued. It was a Spanish pop song but with English lyrics added in places. Dorothy looked at John and simply said, "Are you going to do the dance or are they going to miss out on the real reason the song was a hit?" John held out his arms straight, put them across his chest, on his head, on his hips, and then turned. Dorothy did the same as the two did the supposed dance in front of the kids. John shut the music off and let the kids laugh it out before telling them the bad news he had been saving. He had them do the fun stuff first before starting a review block. They would go over stuff Mr. Poland taught them and prepare for a big test. John freely admitted, "I don't want to give this to you but I have to. But I don't have to count it as a big grade." The kids thanked him for that but weren't happy about taking a test so late in the year. They spent the next week reviewing which caused many of them to roll their eyes in annoyance. John felt bad about it. To his surprise, John received an invitation to the high school graduation. The students had asked that he speak at the graduation as their guest. John was flustered and couldn't refuse their request as many of the graduates were some of his best students. He showed up in his best suit and mingled with the dignitaries. Louis Reagan, John's longtime friend, and mentor was among them. Louis knew about his recent college graduation and asked him about his plans. John told him, "I don't know. I have more hours to do to earn my license since my waiver was denied and I need to find a new placement to earn them. I believe I have just another semester to do at this point but it's pretty late in the cycle to find a spot in the schools." Louis sympathized with him. He said, "You will find a place. You have strong recommendations from many here so any school is blessed to have you." John thanked him for his support as they took their seats up on the stage. The speeches were your typical graduation speeches. Jake Bollinger was able to move things along smoothly but they were still taxing on the students. When John's time came the students cheered loudly. John flashed a big smile and thanked them for that. John composed himself then said, "I could give you the usual speech but you have heard it many times over already. Just remember the friends that you made here, they will be part of you forever and may come back into your life out of the blue as your new next door neighbors. Mine did and it was like old times again." The students laughed at that. John continued, "Remember that you learned a lot in four years but while most of the information you learned is useless the methods you used to learn aren't. In fact, they are important. You will use the reasoning, information gathering, summarization, and problem-solving in many ways for the rest of your life. And a little tip, colleges use a lot of the same information so if you paid attention during your four years you should be fine until you start the work on your major." The students laughed again while John smiled at the response. John's speech got a huge applause. John took his seat alongside others. John watched the rest of the graduation with a big smile. Jake congratulated on a great speech that the kids will remember fondly. John left with a big smile and as soon as he got home he told the family about the speech. Back at home, Michael asked, "So all that hard work is really for nothing?" John looked him right in the eyes and said, "No. It's part of the learning process and you will try your hardest in school." On Monday in school John's big speech was the talk of the students. John settled the class down and gave them their tests. The kids grumbled about taking them but were told, "It's a take-home test. No need to do it here, we are going to have some fun in class." The kids started to cheer up now. John explained what he wanted them to do. The kids were to research the city in groups. He purposely assigned Jessica, Jenna, and Claire together with Will, Eric, and George. Scott, Stacy, Jaimie, Richard, Courtney, and Michael were in another group. The assignment was simple: find important buildings and research them then give a short presentation. John was also making one as well. The kids decided to get right into it using the classroom computer as well as their own iPads and cell phones to research. The class was so quiet Dorothy popped in again to check on the class and again was proud of the work being done. She asked John what he was going to do his presentation about and hearing it she gave him a knowing smile. She added, "The kids will get a kick out of one particular artifact." John groaned as he said, "That story is going to be told but it has to be done." Will's group had the retirement home. John talked about volunteering there once and nearly tripping down a hill. The kids laughed with John saying, "They still haven't fixed those darn stairs." Jaimie's group researched the high school. They made a big deal out of what was there before and showed pictures of the construction and expansion. John told a couple of stories of the site before with the kids naturally laughing at his misfortunes. Stacy said she had pictures of John there, John said, "I know it also contains your mom's yearbook photo so two can play that game." John then told them a few stories about the football field and showed them photos from his sisters' yearbooks. The kids loved seeing them until Michael pointed out, "Who is this kid right here?" John quickly shut the book and said, "That's enough for today." Jaimie loudly proclaimed, "It's just a picture of you, no need to be embarrassed." John opened up the book and showed it to the class with Stacy saying, "How come mom never saw that one?" John explained, "The yearbook staff took the pictures, and freshmen weren't part of it." John showed the team photo and said, "She did see this one, though, it was in the city newspaper." The kids looked at the team photo and noticed John blending among the team but with a serious look on his face. John admitted, "We were small in number but played hard. We stunk, though." The kids loved John's joke. Miles asked, "How bad were you?" John admitted, "Slowest, softest hitting, nearly blind. I quit junior year due to too many concussions, it was a nice time but it hurt like heck." John made the final presentation. He showed the kids pictures of the school when it opened and then what was there before. The kids stared in disbelief. John pointed out where he was a student and some of the intricacies of the school down to the fact that it lacked a cafeteria and proper gym. He told the story about the old wooden bench outside the principal's office which he admitted to being sent to a few times. The kids laughed at that admission. Stacy pointed out, "This was why you let Scott and Jessica go on the trip, wasn't it?" John admitted, "We were forced to sit on there until the principal put us to work. I couldn't let that happen to them, they earned the trip and I am proud that they enjoyed it and learned a lot from it." The kids applauded John for the admission. He showed a special photo that he found in the school archives. It was John in 8th grade a month before graduation posing for the camera with a classmate. John was lying down on a railing reading a book while another student held a ball over his head pointing it at him. The kids stared in disbelief at how young he looked. Both principals came in at that moment and stifled laughter at the kids' shock. John smiled and said, "That photo got a huge laugh at graduation, my classmates loved it. It was just supposed to be a random shot of the students but my classmate posed making it too irresistible to ignore." The next photos were of the demolition of the school. John saw something and pointed it out to the kids. "You see this little poster? I put that up. My teacher couldn't reach it when they moved into the new school and left it up. It was the last piece of the old school to fall when it was torn down." The kids looked at John's big smile. The next photo showed further demolition and John gasped in disbelief. He went in for a closer look and was quivering. He quietly said, "I can't believe I never noticed this before. I'm sorry kids, I need a moment." Jenna asked what was going on, John quietly said, "That's my father and me there" as he pointed to two people in the photo watching the demolition. The kids looked closer and nodded at John as they saw the tenderness of the moment. They sat back down silently until the end of class then left John to collect his thoughts. Chapter 28: Beach Day The week was a fun week so John decided to make the weekend a beach trip. The weather was going to be nice and the temperatures in the low 80s making it a perfect beach day. The kids were eager to head back with the girls eager to get some sun before the big graduation night. Jenna and Jessica invited their new boyfriends Eric and George to come along and Hannah dragged Pete along as well. Bryan went solo still unable to find a nice girl who liked him for himself and didn't fear Hannah's wrath. The parents didn't want to miss out on the fun either. Normally they let the Finns handle the kids at the beach but this was more of a full family outing than others had been. Rebecca's friends joined the fun, with the youngsters looking up to the older girls with awe. The parents watched with big grins as John had all the kids put on their sunscreen and ensuring the younger kids wore swim shirts. Iris, Francesca, Jessie, Amy, Kelly, Pete, George, Eric, Scott, and Jessica were forced to endure John's horror story with the rest of the kids and the parents holding back laughs as they cringed in fear. Pete asked the inevitable, "Is it true?" Stacy and Rebecca gave a resounding, "It's true and horrible!" John admitted that last year he made a mistake and forgot his shirt and was burned badly which earned him a laugh while Jaimie and Michael cringed. John took his usual spot in the water and was joined by Quentin and the boys. Pete, Eric, and George stayed away from them and the girls as possible for fear of doing something that would invoke the wrath of the dads. Quentin and John shared looks of humor watching the boys keeping their distance. After a short time, the new boys joined the others, wrestling, and splashing while John and Quentin talked away. The girls joined them from time to time but only when they needed a quick cool down. Richard and Michael teased them about not swimming which the girls proudly said, "We don't need to show off that we can, we just choose to enjoy our time differently." The two fought for a decent reply but all they could come up with was a big splash which got them screams from the girls. On shore, Scott stayed away from the water. He spent much of his time lounging with the younger girls and staying close to Rebecca. The two were getting along nicely; Scott treated her as a little sister and often gave her help with her homework when he was at her house. Jessie knew she thought of him as a big brother, more so than Michael. Even Francesca and Iris eased up on their fears of Rachel's retributions when they saw Scott with Stacy for the first time. Hannah sat down next to him and asked, "Why aren't you swimming? We know you can swim" smiling as she made a dunking motion with her hands to remind him of their mutual experience with swimming. Scott mumbled something about not liking the water. Bryan asked, "Is it because of the pool incident?" Scott quietly nodded. Greta and the mothers asked what he was talking about. Hannah told them what happened two years before at the pool in Missouri. Scott cringed at hearing the full story. He remembered harassing Jaimie and Michael and being humiliated by Hannah but after that it was fuzzy. Hannah asked him, "You don't remember falling in?" Scott shook his head no. Hannah told them about Scott running and falling into the water, hitting his head on the wall as he fell in. She told how nobody tried to do anything about him for several seconds until John jumped in to save him. Scott looked up in shock. He said, "They said I fell in and hit my head, nobody said who saved me only that someone did." Hannah admitted, "Uncle John did and told us he would have done it for anyone even someone who was as bad as you." Greta shook her head in shame knowing that the truth was kept from Scott because of what happened the next night. She cursed her brother- in-law for his actions. Scott would never have hurt Jaimie after that even if he was forced to. His whole life would have been different, both of their lives actually. Hannah cut her off saying, "Jaimie sees it different. He may have hurt her but he gave her a huge gift in what he did. This was the gift of being treated like a regular girl in school and went a long way towards helping her ?grow' into who she needed to be." She made a growing motion with hands towards her chest to emphasize the point. Greta saw the brightness in that but the cost was high adding, "The pain and suffering weren't worth it, though." Scott felt ashamed. He went into the water to John and said, "How come you never told me about the pool?" John admitted, "I didn't think I needed to, that was back in the dark days and you weren't you." Scott asked, "Did you mean what you said, you would save anyone?" John nodded and said, "You see Dan over there? Jaimie saved Dan's life last year despite his being a jerk towards her and not liking her because she is trying to become a girl. She did it all because I told her that you save someone in need regardless of how you feel about them or they feel about you. I meant it then and I mean it now." Scott thanked him, saying, "Nobody told me who saved me." John added bluntly, "I am not surprised considering what happened the next night." Scott felt ashamed again. Scott swam off to join the boys. Quentin asked John if he was going to have a contingency plan for the summer. John thought about it and bluntly said, "I'll be at the beach every day with Rebecca and her friends. No point in groveling anymore, I'll move on to teaching in another city next year and hope at some point there is an opening here." Quentin asked about the kids' plans. John was unsure saying, "After last summer I would understand if none of them want to work. Jaimie doesn't need to and Michael only works so he has money for gifts for his friends." Quentin asked if she had any hobbies. Jaimie was complex and spent a lot of time in school and with friends but never seemed to do much else. Quentin thought it was time she did something more, telling John, "If she doesn't work at least have her doing something constructive." John told him, "The governor keeps trying to get her as an intern but she won't accept. Other people want to exploit her so she keeps away from any other jobs. She doesn't seem to have interests outside of her friends." Quentin had an idea and explained, "What about putting her to work for Melanie or Greta. She could learn skills and keep herself occupied. Plus if she doesn't like it they won't hold it against her. And if all else fails Leslie could use her help with the three kids". John thought it over and had to agree, it was better than sitting at home watching TV all summer. John would discuss this with Jaimie later. Maybe having options would be good for her even if it wasn't exactly what he likes. Nearby Scott and the boys were talking about the summer jobs. Michael and Richard weren't happy Jaimie was looking at doing something else while Will complained about the heat and how the girls got, "Easy jobs" working day care and delivering lunches to younger kids. Scott thought it over and agreed that it was hard work but it was something to do. He told them about the previous summer in town and how the pool was the only place to go and if you weren't there very early you were stuck outside waiting hours to get in. The others looked like they were being lied to but Michael admitted, "One year mom and I went and gave up after an hour. It wasn't worth the wait. If you didn't' go before school ended or got there extremely early you weren't getting in." Pete told them, "At least you can now get jobs. Three years ago we had to fight for a spot in the lottery to get a chance of getting a job." Eric and George added, "None of us can complain, the only one with a legitimate complaint is Jaimie." The boys looked at them in shock. The newbies not only stood up to them but said the one thing nobody wanted to say. They were both one of the group now. The sun started to set and the kids anxious to leave so the group headed for the bathhouse to change into normal clothes. The boys didn't take long and were out within minutes. The girls took much longer but given that they were dirtier the boys didn't mind the wait. As the younger girls waited outside for Jaimie and the older girls to change Rachel Murphy, the self-appointed, "queen of the 6th grade", approached them. She scowled at Kelly, Jessie, and Amy and went right at Iris and Francesca. The two ignored her opting instead to continue talking with the other girls. Rachel blurted out, "I'll give you two one last chance to rejoin me and ditch these losers." Iris and Francesca both looked at her and shouted, "No thanks!" Rachel started to scream. She shouted, "You four idiots ruined my life! You got me suspended and you made these two leave me." She started to go after Rebecca, punching and kicking her as she flung herself forward. Rachel was continuously cursing her for what she allegedly did. Scott grabbed her arm and pulled her back, taking several hits as he tossed her into the sand. Rachel looked at him and demanded that he move, Scott flatly told her, "Leave these six girls alone." Rachel's mother and father ran forward and grabbed Scott and pulled him away cursing him and saying, "Our little angel needs to set these lowlifes straight." Eric and George ran behind them and grabbed them, yanking them off Scott and taking their place standing between them and Scott. Scott blurted out, "You two have no idea what your little angel has actually been doing in school to the other girls." Rachel's parents looked at him as if he was joking saying, "They made up stories about our daughter, they made all of the girls make fun of her, they convinced your principal that our daughter was bullying them." The girls all fought back laughter. Scott fought back laughter as well. He may have been new to the school but he heard all about Rachel directly from the girls. He could also see that she was trouble and no different than he was at that age. He couldn't hold back any longer and bluntly said, "Your daughter is a liar. She is a bully and has been for years. The girls didn't abandon her because of Rebecca, they abandoned her because they didn't like what she was making them do. These girls didn't make fun of her they laughed at her for trying to make up fake stories that nobody in the school believed. I can see why nobody likes her; she's a spoiled brat whose parents are either unwilling or unable to see her faults and blames everyone else for her problems." Scott took a breather and told Rachel without hesitation, "The girls are done with you and won't be bullied by her anymore. Rebecca is my girlfriend's sister and one of us so if you are going to mess with her you are going to mess with all of us." On cue, the other boys came forward standing by the girls. Rachel looked scared and ran off crying while her parents tried to find some way of blaming the girls for her troubles again. The boys held their ground and Rachel's parents moved on after their daughter. They saw who was with the group. They blurted out, "She is with the tranny freak, they are all degenerate and our angel is lucky to be away from that thing." Before they could turn to leave two state troopers held them up and placed them both under arrest. A third had Rachel walking toward the group. The sergeant asked the group, "We witnessed the whole exchange, do wish to press charges against these three?" Rachel's parents tried to protest claiming they were protecting their daughter. Both troopers bluntly stated, "We saw and heard the whole thing, not only did you assault a minor your daughter did the same. Both were unprovoked and judging by the terse comment about this young lady you had best keep quiet. And before you go crying foul the two boys who held you both back from assaulting that boy further are sons of troopers and who have years of martial arts experience so by all means try to claim that they hurt you as you will see just how it feels to be on the wrong side of the law." The three were speechless. They were escorted to an awaiting cruiser while the adults thought about what to do. Rebecca didn't want Rachel to have a criminal record and Scott didn't want anyone else to get in trouble because of him. They didn't want charges filed. The troopers followed their wishes but stated, "They aren't allowed in this or any state-owned park for five years. It's nothing much but it'll give them something to think about. After the excitement of the evening, the families headed home for a late dinner and much-needed showers. The boys stayed over while the girls opted to go home. Jaimie didn't seem to have any objection to the boys staying over and John wasn't about to press the issue. In the basement entertainment room, Will teased Eric and George about the girls swooning over them. The boys didn't say anything, quietly asking them to not talk about it. He nudged them saying, "Don't sell you short, Jenna has never reacted that way towards anyone before and Jessica was impressed with your gentlemanly actions." George perked up at hearing Jenna and Eric added, "I hadn't noticed." Will just laughed at their reactions enjoying ribbing the new guys. In Michael's bedroom, Richard and Michael talked with Scott while the others joked. Scott was taking the incident hard. Richard asked him, "Why feel bad about trying to help your friend when she needed help?" Scott mumbled, "I hate hurting people." Michael bluntly said, "You didn't hurt anyone. You saved your girlfriend's sister when someone was trying to hurt her. That is always a good thing and you should never feel bad about it." Richard added, "Rebecca loves you for it. You know she sees you as a big brother to her. You were the perfect person to stop Rachel and tell off her parents." Jaimie was listening to the three of them talk and started to cry. Scott needed reassurance. She hugged Scott tightly. He started to feel better but Jaimie added, "You are a hero whether you see it or not" which caused him to hug her back. Richard and Michael backed off giving them space and teased Will for anything they could think of. After a few minutes, Jaimie and Scott came over and sat silently while the others joked and teased each other. Valerie and John watched in delight at the scene. Scott handled this night well. The boys now had two new people to hang out with finally evening up the numbers with the girls. Valerie quietly thought that each of the boys and girls had found their counterpart evening out their attitudes and personalities. They seemed like perfect matches and she hoped they stuck together. Valerie thought that Jenna may finally start coming out of her bossy shell with George weakening her tough exterior. She thought he was a good match for her with his lovable brash personality. He had a way of humbling you while making you love him at the same time. The fact that she clearly had a hidden crush on him was beside the point, they complimented each other perfectly. She was pleased that Eric has a gentleman and empathized with the group. The parents loved that he was quiet and didn't try too hard to be funny or impressive. Olivia joked that he might be able to give lessons on toning it down to Will which Lilly hoped would happen soon. Pete was becoming a good friend of Bryan and was able to let Hannah vent while keeping his cool which few people including her own family had been able to do. These kids may be suffering young love but their friendships were true compliments to one another. She envied them, wishing she had that when she was their age. Chapter 29: Adoption and Celebrations Sunday morning the boys hung around the house. Jaimie wasn't up to heading out and they didn't want to do anything without her. She and the boys played video games and talked throughout the day. Jaimie didn't even try to answer her phone calls or texts from the girls, she wasn't in the mood for the usual girl talk. She was actually having fun without the girls. It had been a long time since she was "one of the guys" as they put it, Richard wasn't trying to treat her as a girlfriend and Michael toned down his teasing while the others just saw her as their friend who was a girl. Eric and George never noticed the change, they only saw Jaimie the person sitting there. Jaimie was enjoying the day more than she thought. She was so wrapped up in being girly that she forgot how to just be herself. Richard and she were getting along better than they had in months with any tension evaporated. Will teased her the same as he teased the others. She was trading barbs quicker than he could return them leaving him frequently speechless. Eric and George were overwhelmed with the whole situation. The boys usually kept to themselves and had few friends so being entrenched among the group and having them enjoy their company was eye opening. Jaimie sensed the fear and hesitation and kept them reassured by teasing Will when he tried to get one over on them. Scott seemed to finally have a burden lifted from him. He had helped Rebecca and Jaimie showed her gratitude by reassuring him what he did was right. It was the best he had slept and felt in ages and he looked renewed and ready to move on. The heavy burden of his dad's influence evaporated. He couldn't hurt him anymore. He was in prison. Scott saw that he wasn't the small, helpless boy who did daddy's bidding, he was a young man who had friends and loving parents! Earlier Jaimie and he talked while the others were still asleep with Scott mentioning how he felt and Jaimie proudly saying, "That means we are truly even. You don't have to fear your past anymore because you made amends internally. You helped someone you care about and had your friends stand by your side when you did it and more importantly you ensured two more friends were made from it." Scott admitted to her, "I hated to do it but am glad I did it. I just hope I don't have to do that anymore." Jaimie quickly shot back and smiled. "So do I." The other boys woke up and saw the two talking it out; Richard told them to stay back until they were done. This was two years in the making and they needed their privacy. John and Valerie weren't fools. They let the boys sort themselves out without their help and let Jaimie get comfortable with them. They had seen a part of Scott last night that he didn't want them to see thanks to that brat but none of them were willing to admit seeing it. The boys were being normal and their actions spoke loudly about how they see Scott. He was their friend and would be protected no matter what, but protecting one of the group meant more than anything to them. Valerie heard Scott and Jaimie talking and let out a huge sigh of relief. The boy had finally let go and Jaimie finally had him realizing she cared about him for him, not for obligation. She watched as the two just sat and talked and had the boys waiting until they were finished before coming into the living room. Will picked up on the change and teased him alongside Eric and George. Scott was barb for barb earning their respect and laughs. The whole group was acting much better than they had before, Jaimie somehow had gotten the six boys to release their built up tension and they were enjoying it. John woke up late and listened to the commotion outside. He saw Valerie watching the boys and Jaimie having their fun and smiling. John simply asked, "Why the change?" Valerie proudly said, "Jaimie." John looked at her oddly and realized she was making them act better. He specifically looked at Scott who was trying his hardest to play their game and didn't see the sadness or fear. It was as if he was the old confident Scott from school. He was even joking with Will, he never did that. John called Greta and Quentin to tell them what was happening. They were almost screaming with joy, they had waited for this moment for months. Jessica woke up and wanted an explanation and frowned asking, "Does this mean Jaimie won't be hanging with us girls anymore?" Greta laughed and asked her, "Why?" which Jessica mumbled, "Because she is with the boys now." John almost burst into tears when Greta said, "Just because she plays video games and talks with the boys don't mean she will abandon you and the girls. Look at Rebecca; can you say she isn't one of the girls because she plays video games with them?" Jessica apologized but John reassured her, "Jaimie and the boys had a lot of tension going on since October and this finally released it. She has been with you girls every day and it was long overdue that she and the boys spent time together. As hard as this may be to believe, they needed her as much as she needed them." Greta got down to more important business. She asked John a favor, "Can you handle Jessica and Scott on Tuesday? We have an important meeting." John asked what it was and she quietly whispered, "Meeting with the judge about Scott's adoption." John told Valerie who confirmed it to him. He gladly agreed but added, "Jaimie won't be fooled but she won't tell them." Greta laughed and hung up. Tuesday afternoon the four drove to the therapy appointments. Jessica didn't ask why she was going along but knew it had to be important if neither of her parents was there to pick her up. Jaimie was told at the last minute and sworn to secrecy. She was struggling to contain her joy, though. Inside the office, Dr. Eliza greeted Jaimie and Scott. Jaimie rushed her inside and told her the news which gave her a good deal of relief, it was getting harder and harder to contain her excitement. Dr. Eliza was thrilled to hear the news and proud to hear about Scott. Jaimie sang his praises and told her that he finally got over his past. Jaimie went on to talk about what happened since their last meeting particularly about the previous weekend. Dr. Eliza smiled at her and asked her the unasked question, "Why did you stop being friends with the boys?" Jaimie thought about that long and hard. She knew she was friendly with them but after she started seeing Richard as her boyfriend they moved away from friends. Jaimie was sad to admit, "I saw them differently. I guess I must have been so focused on being girly and fighting those feelings that we grew apart." Dr. Eliza agreed adding, "They never stopped seeing you as a friend; even as you became more womanly you were still their friend. It's as tough for them as it is for you but they still see you as the person that you always were." Jaimie felt better and admitted, "I missed the games and the talking; the girls just aren't the same. There is only so much gossip and makeovers and watching TV and listening to music that we can do. They just don't have that many hobbies or interests as a group. I love them all but it was fun to do something different." Dr. Eliza laughed, it was odd to hear someone understand her friends the way Jaimie does. At the end of the session, Jaimie asked Dr. Eliza to come to her graduation party. Her mother was throwing it for the kids since she was so important to her since she came to Winnisimmet she felt Dr. Eliza deserved to be there. She was responsible for helping Jaimie along for the past two years alongside everyone else. Dr. Eliza was delighted and agreed to go. In the waiting room, Dr. Eliza smiled towards Scott. Scott didn't know how to react and smiled back. John asked Jaimie quietly, "Did you tell her the news?" Jaimie nodded. Jessica tried to listen in on what they were saying but Jaimie quickly changed the subject and talked with her about something unrelated. Scott went off with Dr. Dane and came back out almost an hour later smiling. Dr. Dane pulled John aside and asked, "That girl is a miracle worker." John looked at Jaimie and simply said, "No, she just brings out the best in people." Dr. Dane added, "Well it worked; he may not need therapy much longer. He has finally broken through his troubles and starting to feel great." John told him, "He is getting a big shock in a couple of hours. His adoption came through." Dr. Dane grinned widely and said, "Then make that one more session as that was his last unresolved issues. Scott is going to be fine; he has a strong support network, a family who loves him, and now friends who understand him. He needed one big thing to show he was a new person and it happened. I am proud of the man he is becoming with all of your help, you all deserve as much praise as him for his change." John left with a big grin. Jaimie knew something big happened and tried to pry it out of him. Scott and Jessica noticed the change and kept quiet about it hoping it wasn't something bad. Back at the house, Jaimie begged to be told but John kept telling her, "It's none of your concern." After an hour Greta called and the group headed to their house. Scott and Jessica noticed a big, "Congratulations" banner and all of their friends inside. John and Jaimie had big grins as Greta handed Scott a manila envelope. He opened it cautiously and read the documents inside. Scott started shaking and handed them to Jessica who started to cry. John asked Scott, "Aren't you going to sign it?" Scott took the pen from his hand and signed the forms. He asked, "Why the name change?" Quentin proudly said, "You are our son and shouldn't have to explain why your name is West when we are all Nelson. Your mom suggested naming you Quentin but as much as I love my name it doesn't suit you. Think of it as a clean break from everything." Scott hugged his new mother and father while Jessica hugged him. Scott asked, "What about my diploma? Isn't it too late for them to change it?" John explained, "They write the names manually the day before and Principal Vega was told yesterday. It'll be fine." Scott seemed to finally be at ease with the situation, joining the boys in their verbal teasing. John pulled Scott aside and told him the good news about therapy. Scott looked as he if was lying but John admitted, "You would be surprised what the power of friends and family can do for your self-confidence. You are stronger than you think and you have people who love and support you. You don't need someone to tell you that anymore, you know it to be true. You saw it with your own eyes." The boys and girls joined up. Stacy joked that, "Rebecca's classmates can't stop talking about Scott." Will joked, "Where does he keep the shining armor?" Eric and George thought for a second and both said, "Don't worry, one day you will have the courage to stand up like that." The girls burst into laughter leaving Will fumbling for words. Jenna gave George a big kiss for that while Jessica hugged Eric. The two girls looked at each other and nodded, they were the right boys for them. Stacy asked, "How much do you owe Rebecca for matchmaking?" Rebecca proclaimed, "I should have charged an arm and a leg but for those boys it was priceless!" Jenna blushed in embarrassment while Jessica asked, "Why didn't we do this before?" Rebecca shot back, "You were new, Jenna was stubborn and vain, and the boys were too afraid of the four boys to risk their wrath." Jenna burst out laughing while the others tried not to agree. Eric and George just smiled and kept their mouths shut, earning them another hug and kiss from the girls. Chapter 30: Graduation Thursday morning was a huge day for the students. John had told them they would spend the time playing games rather than doing actual work. He cleverly disguised actual review work as games just in case one of the parents or other teachers thought they were just wasting time. The students didn't notice and John wasn't about to spoil the fun. Jaimie and her group were the only ones who didn't play games. John felt it wasn't worth the effort; they were too hyperactive and enjoyed talking about their upcoming summers to bother. Jaimie was still unsure whether she wanted to work with Greta and Melanie or work alongside her friends. George suggested she do both since she wasn't actually earning anything. Eric added that she should do what she felt was the best use of her time. The debate took up a large amount of time. John jokingly told them, "You weren't supposed to actually do any work today, I guess now you have learned to debate." The kids looked around in shock as the class was almost over. John calmed them down and told them something he had been holding back for a while. He looked around the room and said proudly, "You kids have been amazing. You are made up a diverse group who were born and raised here, came to live here from elsewhere, have family from here, or who became family here. 12 of you are family to me but all 26 of you are my students. I take my job seriously and I take teaching you seriously. This is why today is so hard for me, as I know you are moving on to the high school and will be taught by people who I know are amazing people. I'll miss teaching you but I know you are going to be in good hands. Thank you all for the memories, you have made these past two and a half months the happiest two months of my life." John had tears in his eyes as the final bell rang. The kids filed out silently while John remained behind to gather his personal effects and leave the room for the final time. As John was locking the door for the last time Dorothy handed him a small box. John opened it up and saw a stack of papers with, "What I learned on our field trip" written across the top. John smiled at the sight. Dorothy smiled and explained, "Mr. Poland was extremely reluctant to hand these over but it was explained to him by the union representative that he had no right to the papers and if he refused there would be serious consequences in addition to the consequences of his outburst against you. Mr. Taylor was quite convincing in that regard." John hugged Dorothy and thanked her for all she had done for him during the last three months. Dorothy could barely contain her affection, adding, "You are my friend, it was the least I could do for you. Now you better get a move on we have a big night ahead of us!" Outside John was all smiles as Michael and Jaimie helped him to the car while they and the rest of the group headed to their homes for the short break before the graduation ceremony. The whole group of 30 was dressed classy for the ceremony. John, Dan, Quentin, Bryan, and the boys wore suits and ties. The Hannah, the girls, and their mothers all wore dresses. John's sisters and the Johnsons weren't attending, they would be handling the group's party at a function hall and would watch the event afterward. The group arrived all at once making it look like an invading army was descending on the school. John spotted Dorothy and gave her his thanks for allowing him to teach. Dorothy tried hard to keep a straight face and simply said, "It was a pleasure." Mr. Taylor greeted him at the door and the two talked for several minutes as the group got settled. Mr. Taylor asked him to hang around outside with the faculty, several of them wanted to speak with him. John tried to get inside and be with the other families but was stopped by Jake Bollinger. John asked what he was doing there, he wasn't aware that Gabby had invited him to be there. Jake shook his head and joked, "It's part of the program that I say a few words of greetings on behalf of the high school. Plus I couldn't miss my niece's big night." John was completely embarrassed and tried to excuse himself again but was stopped by more teachers. Mrs. Eagleson tried her hardest not to laugh as she watched John wiggle through the throng of teachers. She insisted he talk for a bit about her newest students, ones he knew all too well- Rebecca and her friends. John tried to be as nice as possible and keep the conversation short. Alice Rodriguez couldn't contain her laughter anymore and finally said, "John, will you stop trying to join your family. You are faculty tonight and belong among us." John settled down and took his spot next to Mr. Taylor. They were led in and John got a big cheer as the students saw him among their teachers. John was pleased and embarrassed but Mr. Taylor bluntly said, "Did you really think Alice and Dorothy would let you be anywhere else tonight?" John said, "Yes" but Mr. Taylor laughed it off. Both principals greeted the students and parents. They made speeches and sang the praises of the students. The usual dignitaries gave more speeches and congratulations. After three similar speeches students and teachers alike were tired and bored. Dorothy introduced special awards which Alice handed out. Two kinds of awards were given out, ones voted on by the students and ones selected by the faculty. John had made his recommendations but he didn't expect his choices to be selected. The popular vote awards went to Jenna and a boy from the other middle school. She was thrilled to earn it and earned a large round of applause. The faculty recommendation awards were given to several students. Scott won an award for his outstanding performance as a student and humanitarian. Jaimie was given an award for her outstanding grades and her academic assistance to many students. Finally, Stacy was given an award for her actions helping new students in need. She was more shocked than anyone and had to be egged on to accept. The awards led to the speech by Jake Bollinger who did the usual greeting and expectations from the students. He offered a special congratulation to Jaimie adding, "We have had two years to prepare for your arrival and the thought of you debating them still brings shivers to all of the teachers." The kids laughed while Jaimie had a smug smile. After Jake finished the students were given their diplomas one by one. Jaimie's group had the largest cheers with Jaimie herself getting the loudest. Dorothy offered her, Scott, Jessica, and Michael big hugs as well as kisses. They were in tears as their friends patted them on their backs. As the last student received his diploma Dorothy and Jake took to the podium and showed a large envelope. Dorothy stated, "Two weeks ago we received a package from the state teacher licensing commission. Inside was a letter that read: ?Last month we received several dozen letters from concerned students and parents regarding the potential licensing of a Mr. John Finn. We were asked to review his request for a waiver and acceptance of his teaching hours done while in the State of Missouri. Upon review, it was determined that a waiver never reached the commission and no record of it was found. Further review found that the member who met with Mr. Finn had violated proper procedures and has since resigned. A full emergency review was conducted and interviews with Dean Zane of Salem State, Jake Bollinger of Winnisimmet High School, and Dorothy Vega and Alice Rodriguez of Winnisimmet Middle School we have determined that the hours taught in Missouri were irrelevant due to the emergency placement in a full-time position teaching 8th grade history for the last 10 weeks of the school year. Those hours combined with hours worked during November, January and March have exceeded the required hours and with all other work completed he is hereby granted a license to teach in the Commonwealth of Massachusetts'." John could not believe what he just heard and was stunned. Dorothy called him to the podium and handed him the letter and license certificate. Jake Bollinger stepped forward and proudly stated, "I know you were of the belief that you would not be able to work for us but I told you that you always had a place with us and I meant it. Here is your official offer of employment as our newest history, government, and geography teacher. Hundreds of students would be disappointed if you didn't accept, and I believe 26, in particular, will be outraged." John accepted silently as the kids applauded loudly. John quickly took his seat as Alice closed the ceremony. Dorothy gave one last request to the students saying, "Since you are leaving us as a teacher and heading to the high school please do our students the honor and lead them there as well." John got up and stood in front of the students leading them out of the gym towards the library while the parents exited. The kids gathered around him and smiled as John tried his best to keep calm. Jaimie and Michael hugged him deeply while their friends gathered around him. Many of the kids were taking pictures with John's group just biding their time before leaving. Dorothy came in and Jaimie, Michael, Jessica, and Scott gave her big hugs. Dorothy told them, "I'm proud of you four. I'll miss having you and hope that things are better in high school." Scott told her, "remember Rebecca and Jessie are still going to school here, you won't be rid of us for another two years." Dorothy laughed and said, "True, but it won't be the same. There's something special about you that makes this job tougher and more enjoyable." Back in the gym, the families were slowly departing. Close to the group one parent complained, "The tranny freak got an award because they felt bad for it." Dan was about to say something when another student's father shot back, "That so-called ?tranny freak' worked her tail off to earn her grades and saved more students from failing you can count. My own son passed because of her so learn the facts before shooting your mouth off." Multiple parents said the same thing about Jaimie. Several young children asked, "What did Jaimie do that was wrong? She's a nice girl." The loudmouth tried to find something to say but couldn't. The kids asked again then said, "If she didn't do anything then why are you calling her names?" The loudmouth was unable to answer, the kids said, "She didn't do anything then you shouldn't call her names. It's not nice of you." The kids and their parents left leaving the loudmouth to face Jaimie's family and friends by himself. He took one look and saw how many people were there and left fast. Nobody said a word, they didn't need to. The group went outside to meet the kids. The kids happily hugged their parents and relatives while John looked on with a big grin. Rebecca and Jessie looked upset. John asked them what was wrong to which Jessie admitted, "We were hoping you'd stay at the school." John tried to appease her by saying, "I'll be there for you, and you will have more chances to have me in high school than in 8th grade." The girls weren't too pleased but couldn't deny that he was right. The kids posed for dozens of pictures before finally heading off for the party. The Johnsons, Karen, and Leslie greeted the group and posed for more pictures. John showed them his surprise. Joseph slapped his back saying, "Nicely done son, nicely done." John proudly said, "Thanks, dad, but this was all the kids and parents' doing." Joseph almost choked hearing what the students and their parents had done on his behalf, embracing John and telling him, "That's about as big of a compliment you could ever get." Chapter 31: Party Time John and the group settled in. More guests started to arrive. Louis Reagan came over and gave Jaimie and Michael big hugs while congratulating John. Jaimie joked, "Dad almost fainted when he heard the news; the principals said they were trying their hardest to keep it a secret all week long." Louis stared at him angrily and asked, "Why didn't you ask for help?" John quietly shot back, "You know me better than to ask that." Louis rarely got stern but this time he gave John a blunt, "There are times when you need to ask for help. You spent months scared that you might not have a job or enough hours when all you needed to do was ask either me or Christian James for help. You know I know people and you know I'd help you in any way possible, you didn't have to endure that alone! One simple question from Christian could have gotten you approved right then and there, don't you ever do something so stupid again!" John apologized but Louis simply added, "There is good from that. You saw how much impact you really had on those kids. The fact that they and their parents would be willing to go behind your back and ask on your behalf is the greatest compliment they could give you. But still, set aside your humility and ask for help when you really need it." John tried to change the subject. He asked Louis about his youth organization. Louis frowned and told him, "It's in trouble. We can't find anyone to volunteer for the kids' program. We asked the summer jobs program for workers to be assigned to us but they refused. They weren't happy with my involvement with Jaimie last summer and took it out on my program." John grew furious and told Joseph who made a couple of quick calls. John looked at Louis and said, "They made a big mistake. Dad is overseeing our contributions and is on the board. If it's true someone is in deep trouble there. Your program was one of the most important postings for kids." Louis looked at Jaimie with surprise, she nodded saying, "Grandpa never votes and never participates but is still on the board. He is the tie- breaker but he never has to break ties." Joseph came back over and bluntly said, "The director has been fired. Any request for the use of the workers has to go before the board and your requests never made it. It turns out that our old friend Penelope Clarence used one of her husband's relatives. Apparently, she is a Benson, as in former Chief of Police Benson. He broke the rules multiple times with his actions and barely kept from breaking the law. You will be getting as many workers as you need and a formal apology." Louis thanked him. He asked Jaimie if she wanted to work with him, Jaimie asked, "Can the others work as well? I don't want to do it if it's just me." Louis smiled and said, "All of you can, I want people I know and trust to help more than anyone else." Jaimie told the others, Courtney and Claire declined in favor of working at the day care center while Will, Eric, and George opted to clean the streets. Louis thanked the group and told them he expected great things from them. Dr. Eliza showed up next and was immediately hugged by Jaimie. She was shown to a seat surrounded by the kids who all said their hellos. Richard was embarrassed when she announced she had heard all about them, Jaimie assured him, "I left out the embarrassing stuff." Dr. Eliza excused herself for a minute to go talk with John while the kids talked among themselves for a bit. Dr. Eliza went over to John and gave her congratulations, offering, "I was beginning to worry about you, you were looking extremely down for the last two months." John was shocked and said, "How could you have known?" Dr. Eliza gave a sly smile adding, "You are asking how a therapist could have seen that?" John blushed as she tried to stifle a giggle. She then admitted, "Jaimie told me about you and from the look tonight and the change in attitude it was a good chance you got your license granted." John laughed and nodded then introduced her to the parents. Valerie gave her a big hug as did Melanie. Olivia and Greta offered her a seat but she politely declined saying, "Jaimie and the kids have one waiting for me." Melanie joked, "Hope you have earplugs, the kids are going to go crazy over the surprise in a few minutes." John looked at her funny then decided to back away as she explained to her what it was. John had a feeling it was something involving embarrassing photos since his sisters set the party up. Dr. Eliza looked at John and had a big smile which confirmed it. John noticed Jake, Alice, and Dorothy entered followed by a few of his fellow teachers. They all gave him big hugs and congratulated him. John tried to thank them but they refused saying, "We didn't do anything." Dorothy asked if they missed the fun, John shook his head and said, "No you are right on time, the humiliation starts in a few minutes." Jake walked over to his sister and gave her a hug then hugged his nieces while the others chatted away. Bryan, Hannah, and Pete tried to go unnoticed but Jake said hello to the three making them cringe while the others laughed. Jake joked, "Don't worry I'll be on a first name basis with all of you before long." All of them stopped giggling and cringed at the thought. Leslie and Karen got everyone's attention. They congratulated the kids on their graduation and told them, "John will be ensuring that all of you do well in school whether you want to or not." The kids grumbled while the teachers laughed. The lights dimmed and everyone took their seats with John joining the adults while Dr. Eliza sat between Jaimie and Scott. Pictures of all of the kids when they were babies were shown followed by pictorials of the kids through the years. Jaimie had few pictures but there were a few that featured her that were taken by Valerie or Greta. Eventually, there was a short break and pictures of the four kids and John were shown. Dr. Eliza watched as Jaimie smiled at the memories. Pictures of John and the tutoring program kids were shown, with several showing the four kids together. Scott was tense but Stacy stroked his hand reassuring him. Several of John with Scott or Jessica were shown, Stacy told him, "You look so dignified" to which he whispered, "Thank you." Michael laughed at how he looked with Courtney smiling and saying, "You looked cute then." Richard looked toward Jaimie and proudly said, "You looked so cute then even in boy's clothes." Jaimie blushed as the Doctor smiled. The next picture caused Scott to cringe. It was John and Jaimie at home relaxing. The odd thing was the scratches and bruises on Jaimie. Dr. Eliza whispered, "No need to feel bad, that was the happiest day of her life." Jaimie nodded at him, Stacy asked, "What is she talking about?" Scott mumbled, "That was the day her dad took Jaimie in after I beat her up." Stacy squeezed his hand and whispered, "From that bad thing came something amazing, you saved her life." Scott looked at Jaimie who whispered, "It's true." Scott leaned his head against Stacy and kept silent. Michael laughed at one picture saying, "He is trying to cook like Great Uncle Jorge" which showed John over a pan of rice with Jaimie watching. Karen joked, "That explains why you keep going to his house for dinner!" which got a big laugh making Michael cringe. The next showed Michael and Jaimie doing homework with John watching TV. More showed Jaimie and John in Boston, at the beach, and with the family for the first time. She looked subtly different in each shot, the kids seeing Jaimie's change right before their eyes. The picture John took of her with the Governor Christian James got a big howl from the boys and a happy, "My first time in a dress and I met the most powerful man in the state." Dr. Eliza asked her, "How come you never told me about that?" Jaimie smiled and said, "I forgot about it, it was all one big happy weekend for me as it was my first time being a girl." Dr. Eliza nodded and smiled. The pictures returned to another baby. Michael and Jaimie blurted out, "It's dad!" which the other kids couldn't believe. The pictures showed John growing up with his many proud and humorous moments. The kids laughed at a few of the pictures which John cringed at while mumbling, "I should have hidden those better." Valerie and Melanie whispered, "We have copies" to which he groaned. Several new ones were shown, ones that Jaimie and Michael had never seen. They featured John in his mid-teens through high school. The kids recognized the school and asked, "Louis or Dorothy or Alice?" Louis happily replied, "All of us." The kids giggled and watched the show continuing. More from John's teen years appeared but these were different. They showed John helping out kids and other students or participating in some activity. Jaimie and Michael finally recognized it as his work with Louis. The kids asked what it was all about and said, "It's what we are going to do this summer. Dad did that when he was our age; it was what led him to want to be a teacher." The kids looked at John who was embarrassed but had a slightly pleased look. Pictures of John in high school appeared. The kids laughed at him running around as a quasi-cheerleader but he smiled at the memory. Pictures of his later years featuring Melanie and their friends got a big, "Awe" from the kids. Melanie and John both smiled while Dan tried to fight a laugh. The last sets were featuring John with Hannah and Bryan. The kids all smiled at the baby pictures and the twins crawling all over John. Most featured Hannah and John with Hannah always smiling as John was caught doing something fatherly. Hannah and Bryan winced at the pictures while Pete had a big smile and said, "You two had too much fun." Hannah tried to fight a smile and lost giving Pete a peck on the cheek and a, "Thank you." After the slide show, the kids let out a big cheer while John tried to make himself scarce. The kids wouldn't let him off easily though and sat him down while everyone chatted with him. Dr. Eliza smiled at him which he embarrassingly replied, "So you know the real John Finn." She nodded and added, "It explains a lot about you. You are a good person helping people his entire life." She excused herself thanking Jaimie for inviting her and hugging Michael goodbye. Quentin patted John on the back for being such a good sport, adding, "All they missed were potty training pictures." John shot back, "Don't give them any ideas." Dan came over and asked if he needed Rebecca to steal the pictures, John mumbled, "I already asked and she refused to do it, something about wanting blackmail material just in case." The three guys went outside to get a breather while the others chatted inside. Dan handed John a check for the amount John invested into this business the year before. John looked it over and handed it right back saying, "If you seriously thought I would accept it you don't know me well at all." Dan and Quentin both laughed while Quentin handed Dan $10. Quentin admitted, "He bet me you wouldn't accept the check, I said you would give it to Greta and have her invest it in his name. I lost." John took the $10 and said, "You both lose, that's exactly what I was going to tell him to do." The three walked inside and told Greta what to do, the other parents laughed at John's actions. Greta told John, "At this rate I might have to hire another person to keep up." John looked at Karen and said, "I know the perfect person." Epilogue John walked right over to where Karen was sitting and offered the job of Greta's assistant. It was going to be for twice the pay that she was earning at the department store and for better hours. Karen tried to refuse, she loved John but this was a huge decision. Greta told her, "You deserve a better job," to which John added, "You own your home, your kids are old enough to look after themselves most of the time, and you aren't earning much at the store. You deserve a job where you can make a difference and not come home drained from dealing with customers who could care less about you." She accepted provided she get proper training. Greta agreed and set aside time the next day to show her the ropes. With Karen by her side dealing with the front end of the business Greta was able to take on more accounts. Karen was great with people and had a knack for predicting good investments while cultivating better deals with current clients. The two were earning hefty commissions by the end of the summer allowing Karen to start a nest egg for the future which Greta happily oversaw. Melanie hired a proper assistant for Dan and got together with Leslie to open a daycare center. Melanie had a degree in early childhood education and Leslie had experience with young children so they made a perfect match. They had a ready-made supply of kids to care for due to the high demand for trained care centers and with word of mouth about Melanie being close to John. Leslie was able to attend school at night allowing her to work towards her degree and expand the business to more kids. The twins and DJ were happy to have loved ones around them all the time as well as play with other kids. Their center was usually full as the Finn name carried a lot of clout in the city. Dan expanded his business and often helped out at the local technical high school earning him important contacts as well as young workers who knew his style and respected him. His side business with Quentin took off and the two were able to sell it for a hefty profit allowing both to set aside money for their kids' futures. They would start a house flipping business where they bought and sold homes and from that earned a nice sum of money for both in addition to their normal salaries. Dan and Scott became close once he came to terms with Stacy's womanhood. Scott impressed him with closeness with Rebecca often seeing the two talk while Stacy was getting ready for her dates or the two were hanging out around the house after work. Rebecca admitted that he was like a big brother and was different than the other boys especially Michael. Scott didn't mind that, saying, "I always wanted a younger brother or sister." Quentin's promotion was well earned and he was on track for a partnership in the near future. His ideas were different than the ones that the office had been used to and his input on projects was often what made the difference between retaining or losing a client. His own designs were well received and praised by his superiors. Scott and Quentin developed a close bond with Quentin encouraging him to draw whenever he had an idea. Scott's designs were noticed by a client who asked him if he was an artist. He wanted Scott to create more art like his designs. Scott was flattered but declined, citing that they were not for anyone else but himself. Quentin was proud of him for what he did and assured him that whatever career he chose he would stand behind him 100%. He did add, "I wouldn't mind if you went into architecture, though." Scott smiled and said, "I might do that. I just want to keep my options open." Louis Reagan's program experienced problems as several parents pulled their children from it when they heard Jaimie was involved. Louis soldiered on and proudly declared, "We won't discriminate against someone, but if that is the lesson you want to teach your children then so be it." The kids who were removed weren't happy and openly complained to their parents that they don't want to leave and don't want to be known as kids who are bigots. Their parents tried to reason with them but the kids didn't want to listen. They boldly said, "You are wrong to do this and are wrong about her. You don't have to go to school with the kids making fun of you for hating Jaimie but we do. We don't want to leave." The parents kept trying to reason but gave up. The fight wasn't worth fighting and the kids were getting teased daily because of it. Jaimie took the incident hard. Louis had to tell her a story about her father and the same exact situation. Jaimie tried to reason that she was too much of a problem for anyone. Louis countered with, "You are a problem I am proud to have. You are irreplaceable and worth fighting for." She gave in after he asked her, "Who is really being hurt here if you leave?" She realized it was worth fighting for the kids. Jenna and George spent long hours talking after work. The two walked home as they lived on the same block and often stopped at the park to enjoy some of the afternoon sun. George toned down his joking and Jenna started to become open to suggestions from others. He never tried to make any moves on her and would always compliment her looks. After two long walks, she kissed him deeply on the lips. George didn't react, letting her kiss him. George asked her, "What was that for?" Jenna smiled and said, "It's for being so sweet and considerate. You changed for me and you changed me." George leaned in and kissed her back, adding, "We really have to pay Rebecca back." Jessica and Eric knew what George and Jenna did on their walks and did the same. They took a longer route as it meant they could stop for sodas and enjoy their time together. Eric didn't say much, Jessica didn't either. The two somehow knew what the other was thinking and let their eyes do the talking. Eric often held her hand and kissed her cheek goodbye when he dropped her off at her house. After the third time, Jessica grabbed his arm and gave him a deep kiss on the lips. Her mother and father were both watching and saw Eric almost faint at the kiss. Jessica practically floated up the stairs as Eric walked home in a fog. Quentin and Greta didn't try to say anything about the kiss. Courtney and Claire spent much of their time in the daycare regretting it. Changing diapers and dirty clothes got old fast. The teachers were making them do all of the dirty work while they kept the kids occupied. They thought they would be reading to them, playing blocks, and coloring but they were doing everything but that. After multiple kids became sick from one child they were sent home for their own safety and reassigned to where the others were working. They were thrilled and the older kids happily accepted the additional mentors. Michael, in particular, was happy but Louis smartly kept the two separated into different groups. Louis was smart enough to know John wouldn't be happy that his son was spending his working hours being googly-eyed and drooling over his girlfriend. Courtney and Michael spent a lot of time after work together. Michael was frequently over Courtney's house and ate dinners with her family. Gabby grew to like him and treated him as one of the family. Courtney and he would either talk or watch TV, always under the watchful eye of Gabby of Jessie. The two did kiss but it was often a goodnight kiss and nothing more. He was happy to leave it at that and Courtney was proud that he didn't try to do more. Gabby was happy for them. He was a good influence on her. He brought out the best in her and she brought out the best in him. Her brothers were jerks towards him but he ignored them. He was only concerned about Courtney and Jessie and endured the abuse for their sake. Eventually, they went too far, cornering Michael and punching him several times. They were unceremoniously told to leave and were thrown out of the house. The oldest two opted to live with friends while the younger one was sent to live with his grandparents for the summer then told to find a new place to live. Pete and Hannah spent much of their free time together. Pete was trusted by Karen. Even when she was not home he would be at their house with Hannah. Karen knew Hannah would break Pete in half if he got fresh and Hannah was not the kind of girl to do anything beyond kissing. He feared her wrath and Karen was glad that he understood her boundaries and respected her wishes. Pete's friends tried to encourage him to go further but Pete proudly shot back, "Do you really expect me to take advice from three people who have never had an actual girlfriend before? Why should I do anything when I don't have to? I have a girl I love and whom I hope loves me back and her brother is a good friend who would break me in half if he found out I tried to do something with his sister. Sorry but I am not tossing out two great relationships just because you say I need to do something." When one of them tried to say something else Bryan popped out and asked what they were talking about to which Pete proudly retold their suggestions. He wasn't amused and the three saw just how protective Bryan was. Bryan didn't need to hit them, he simply said, "I wouldn't expect any girls to date you until college. You three clearly have no idea how to talk to women, treat women, or act around women and clearly have no consideration for their feelings. I am glad Pete knows how to do all of those things. You would be wise to learn from him but after today I doubt he will want anything to do with you three." Pete earned a big hug and deep kiss from Hannah when Bryan told her what happened. Hannah proudly said, "I love you too." Bryan rolled his eyes and walked out giving them a chance to kiss while muttering something about getting a girlfriend for himself. Hannah got the girls involved in cheerleading as soon as the summer started. Jaimie opted not to join the team claiming it would be a constant battle but the girls refused to accept it and treated her as a member anyway. They didn't care if she refused to participate during the games, she was one of them no matter what. Hannah's friends and teammates all had crushes on Bryan but none of them acted on them. That is until Jaimie confronted them about it. Paige Seville listened to her words and said, "OK no more crushing. It's time to either put up or shut up." None of them had the guts to ask him out, so Paige did it. She shocked the others and made Hannah laugh with pride. Jenna, Claire, Courtney, Stacy, and Jessica were barely able to contain their laughter as the older cheerleaders tried to understand what was happening. Hannah smiled at all that was happening. She proudly stated, "Whoever would dare risk the wrath of me to date my brother was worthy of dating him. And he likes Paige a lot. They have gone out before but never could see that they liked one another. She also holds true to the old ?don't date your brother or sister's friends' rule." The others looked at her as if she was joking but she smiled at the two talking and took his smile to mean it worked. He had a date and a new girlfriend. The first person she thanked was Jaimie, the next was Hannah. The others just watched in horror and pride, Jaimie just winked and let the issue die out. John spent the summer teaching summer school. The students weren't happy to have to relearn things again but with John's style, they started to understand and improved. The students tried hard for him and the results were no failures or repeats just improvements in attitude and grades. John was praised for his work but he gave sole credit to the students. John and the younger girls were fixtures at the beach. Rebecca and Thomas remained close and their closeness grew into a blossoming love. The two constantly had their hands clasped together whenever they sat or stood next to each other but neither seemed to notice. Thomas was always a gentleman and Rebecca's heart fluttered whenever he was around. John had to tell him multiple times that he was doing great things with Rebecca, while Dan had to constantly remind himself that she was growing up. Valerie eventually left her job at the law firm. The money was great but often the hours were hard and the strain immense. She simply didn't enjoy it anymore now that she had a family and friends around her. She did volunteer work for those in need to keep occupied but otherwise, she was at home mom with the twins and enjoyed seeing them grow up. John was happy that she found something she enjoyed and felt his love for her never waning or faltering. Jaimie was happy that she had someone at the ready to help her if need be but that never came, fear of Valerie and John's glowing reputation all but evaporated the remaining outward hatred of Jaimie. There were still plenty of people who would talk about her negatively and mock her behind her back but that happened to everyone and as Richard pointed out especially to beautiful girls. The family nights became more frequent. Jaimie didn't feel she needed to be with her friends all the time now that they all had boyfriends. Michael and she were close and remained so despite the occasional fight. They were siblings and understood one another in ways others could not begin to fathom. John and Jaimie were as close as always but even that closeness waned when she started to open up to new activities in school. John was proud of her for that and was often the one the groups came to when they needed someone to advise them. In school one morning Jaimie reflected back on the past two and a half years and couldn't help but smile and shed a few tears. She was happy, healthy, and loved. She had everything she ever wanted and more. The End Author?s remarks: The Finn Family story is far from finished. However, this is the last Winnisimmet Tales story that is able to be purchased. The series was never intended to go beyond the first three books, but after originally posting the stories online feedback was so great that it inspired me to continue writing. The books that followed are all available online at https://bigclosetr.us/topshelf/ and will continue to be so. The feedback from members there shaped the stories therefore they deserve to remain free and available with the ones that I wrote with the first three being available for purchase. The initial book went from being a simple story to being complex to being its own world. The characters evolved over time, with new loves, friends, and family being added. What started out as as an attempt to write a new take on TG fiction evolved into something that is unlike any other. While this is the last book to buy, the tales live on. The stories are worth a read as are many of the other works on Big Closet Top Shelf. Thank you for reading, Efin Great a/k/a efindumb